“咴色調”通过精心收集，向本站投稿了9篇高考英语第一轮总复习讲座之十六（SBⅡ-Units 5-6），下面是小编为大家整理后的高考英语第一轮总复习讲座之十六（SBⅡ-Units 5-6），仅供大家参考借鉴，希望大家喜欢，并能积极分享!
篇1：高考英语第一轮总复习讲座之六（SBⅠ-Units 11-12）
一、单元考点提示
1.单词
A enjoy, alone, lonely, think, life
B some,either,want,improve,about,prepare,difference/different,service
2、短语
A no longer,instead of,be/get angry with sb.,be angry about/for sth.,be full of/fill…with,think well of,make fun of,from…to…,to the east/in the east/on the east,in the open air,make a record,eat up
B write to,ask for,pick up
3、句型结构
1）“had better+不带to的不定式”结构
①肯定句 ②否定句 ③疑问句 ④反意疑问句
2）“Why+不带to的不定式”
“Why not+不带to的不定式”
3）to be sure 其后通常跟that从句、不定式短语或介词短语。
4）it用作形式主语的句型是：It is/was+adj./n.+(for sb.)to do sth.句中不定式短语是真正的主语。
二、考点精析与拓展
I.单词和词组
1.the coming…:the next 即将/正在到来的。
①-Hi,why are you so busy?你好，怎么那么忙？
-Because I’m preparing for the coming examination我正为快要到来的考试做准备
②We have decided to hold a sports meet during the coming autumn.我们已经决定今年秋季开运动会。
2.hear vt,;vi.
（1）听见、听到（声音）。
①Listen!I heard somebody knocking at the door.听！我听到有人敲门。
②Old Granny can’t hear very well.老奶奶听觉不好了。
(2)hear that(宾从)听说某事
①I heard that he had come back.我听说他回来了。
②I heard that we were going to Qingdao for a holiday.Is that true?听说我们要去青岛度假，是真的吗？
（3）hear of 听说；获悉。
①I have heard of him,though I don’t know him.尽管我不认识他，但我听说过他。
②They have never heard of American country music.他们从没听说过美国的乡村音乐。
③They have never heard American country music。他们从没听过美国的乡村音乐。
（4）hear from sb.收到某人的来信。
-Have you heard from Peter recently?最近收到彼得的信了吗？
-No,I haven’t heard from him for three months.没有。我已3个月没收到他的信了。
3、broadcast vt.;vi.广播;播放。过去式和过去分词均为broadcast。
①The BBC broadcasts every day.BBC每天都广播。
②The news was broadcast on the radio.这个消息是收音机里播送的。
4、in the 1950:in the 1950’s 20世纪50年代。介词也可用during。
early/late in the 1990s:in the early/late 1990’s。 20世纪90年代早期/晚期。
5、once more:once again再一次；又一次。
①Read after me once more.再跟我读一遍。
②I’d like to see him once more.我想再见他一面。
6、turn to 其中to为介词。
（1）转向。
He turned to me and said hello to me.他转向我向我问好。
（2）查阅；求助于。
If you are in trouble,please turn to me.如果你有麻烦，请找我。
7、be angry with sb.生某人的气。
be angry at/about sth.因某事而生气。
①Don’t be angry with me for my being late?不要因为我迟到而生我的气。
②What are you angry about?你生什么气？
③He was angry at being kept waiting for so long.让他等了这么久，他很生气。
8．Think well/highly/much of 高度赞扬……；对……赞赏、印象好。
①All the teachers think well of Yang Pei.所有老师都对杨蓓印象很好。
②Our work was well thought of.我们的工作受到了高度评价。
反义词组为：think poorly/little/nothing of
9.make fun of取笑；嘲笑。
①It’s wrong to make fun of the blind.取笑盲人是不对的。
②It’s bad manners to make fun of a person who is in trouble.拿困境中的人开玩笑是不礼貌的。
10．remain link-v.保持；仍旧的。
①He remained silent at the meeting.在会上他一言不发。
②His books remain very new because he hardly read them。他的书仍然很新，因为他几乎没读。
11、keep doing sth.连续、持续地做某事。
①They kept sitting there for several hours.他们在那里连续坐了好几个小时。
②He kept asking silly questions.他不住地问些愚蠢的问题。
12、eat up 吃光；吃掉。
He was so hungry that he ate up all the cakes and none was left.他太饿了，把所有的蛋糕都吃完了，一点也没剩。
类似的短语还有：drink up喝光；喝净。/burn up 烧完；烧掉。/use up 用完；用尽。/clean up打扫干净。
13、go with 与……相配；适合。
I’d like a pair of shoes to go with my trousers.我想要一双和我的裤子相配的鞋。
14、advice建议；劝告。是不可数名词，“一条建议”应用a piece of advice。常用结构。
give sb.advice(on)/give advice给某人提（关于……的）建议；忠告某人。
ask(sb.)for advice征求（某人的）意见。
①Marx gave us some good advice on how to learn a foreign language.关于如何学好外语，马克思给我们提了些好建议。
②If you take /follow my advice,you’ll pass the exam.如果你听从我的建议，你会考试及格的。
③Let’s ask our teacher for some advice.咱们征求一下老师的意见吧。
15、pick up
(1)捡起；捡起。
The naughty boy picked up a stone and threw it at the dog.那调皮的孩子捡起块石头向狗扔去。
（2）用车接；中途顺便搭人接物。
①I’ll pick you up at the school gate.我用车到校门口接你。
②On her way home,she went to the nursery to pick up her son.回家的路上，她顺便到托儿所接她儿子。
（3）接收（相当于receive）。
It’s easy for my radio to pick up VOA.我的收音机接收美国之音很容易。
16、such as 例如；诸如。用于列举同类的人或事物。
①Writers such as Lu Xun and Ba Jin are well-known to all.象鲁迅、巴金这样的作家是众所周知的。
②This summer we’re going to visit some places of interest,such as the Great wall,the Summer palace and the Imperial Palace.今年夏天我们要去参观一些名胜古迹，如长城，颐和园、故宫等。
注意:and so on 等等。用于并列成分之后。
Here you can buy oil,salt,sugar,vineger and so on.在这里可以买到油、盐、糖、醋等。
17、remain;stay
remain vi.逗留、保持；指人（也可指物）逗留在一定的场所，也指物保持原来的形状或状态。
stay 逗留；仅指人（不可用物）逗留在一定场所。
How many weeks shall you remain/stay here?你将在此地停留多久？
I shall remain/stay to see the end of the game.我将留下来看比赛的结果。
Let it remain as it is .听其自然.
It remained unharmed.它仍然无损。
remain+表语（名词、形容词、不定式、分词和分词短语）意为“保持……、仍是……”
作“剩下、遗留”讲，用remain。如：
after the fire, nothing remained to the house.大火过后，屋子所剩无几。
If you take two from four, two remains.四减二剩二。
18.含take 的词组
我们已学习了短语take part in. 有关take的常用短语还有许多，现列举出一些供同学们复习。
take a bath:洗个澡 take a taxi:打的
take off:脱去；起飞 take care of:照料
take exercise:运动 take away:拿走
take a look:看一看 take turns:轮流
take one’s time:慢慢做 take a photo：拍照
take one’s temperature:量休温 take a bus:乘公共汽车
take medicine:服药 take an interest in: 对……感兴趣
take a seat:就座 take the floor：起立发言
take a prize:获奖 take the chair:当主席
take place:发生 take hold of:握住
take a rest：休息一下 take in:收容
take fire：着火 take a drive：乘马车
take a nap:小睡一会儿（午觉） take a shower：洗个淋浴
take a trip:旅行 take a walk：散个步
19．On the air/in the air/by air/in the open air
on the air表示(用无线电、电视)播送节目。如：
What’s on the air this evening?
今晚的广播内容是什么？
These programmes come on the air everyday. 这些节目每天广播。
其反义词为go off the air“停止广播”。如
This radio station goes off the air at midnight.这家广播电台于午夜停止广播。
in the air表示“在空中、在流传中、（问题，计划等）悬而未决（未确定的）、充满了（某种）气氛”。如：
There was dampness in the air.
空气潮湿。
Bofore the matter was publicly announced, it had long been in the air.
这件事在公诸于世之前早就传得满城风雨了。
The plan is quite in the air.
这个计划还很渺茫。
The Spring Festival was in the air for weeks before.几周前就充满了春节的气氛。
by air 表示“乘飞机、由航空”。如
He went to Shanghai by air.
他乘飞机去上海.
in the open air 表示“在户外、在露天里”。如：
People love life in the open air.
人们喜欢露天生活。
20.another day/the other day/some day/one day
another day 可表示近期将来的某一天，意为“改天”，也可表示过去将来某一动作或状态延续的“又一天”。如:
She is coming another day instead of today. 她今天不来，改天来。
You may do it another day.
你可以改天做这件事。
He stayed there (for) another day/another two days after I lift.
我离开后他在那又待了一天/两天。
the other day 相当于a few days ago,意为“几天前、某天、那天、不久前”，句中用一般过去时。如：
I met her in the street the other day.
几天前我在街上碰见过她。
I bought the watch the other day.
这手表我是几天前买的。
some day指将来“总有一天、有朝一日、终将、（日后）某一天”，谓语动词用一般将来时.如:
Your wishes will come true some day.
总有一天你的愿望会实现的。
Some day you’ll have to pay for what you have done.
总有一天你要为你的行为而付出代价的。
one day可以表示“（过去）某一天”，谓语动词常用一般过去式；也可表示“（将来）某一天”，这时可与some day互相代替，谓语常用一般将来时。如：
One day I went to see my first teacher ,but he happened to be out.
有一天，我去看我的启蒙老师，可碰巧他出去了。
He will understand the teacher one day/some day.
将来有一天，他会理解老师的。
21.其他：
①country music乡村音乐
pop music流行音乐
②on the radio在收音机里
on TV在电视里
③make a record做记录；录制唱片
④in the open air 在户外，在野外
⑤on the air:over the air 在广播
⑥in…language用……语言
⑦write（a letter）to 给……写信
⑧tens of thousands of 成千上万的
II．句型
1. no longer 不再。通常置于行为动词之前，动词be之后，偶尔也置于全句的末尾。
①He no longer lives here.他不住这里了。
②Don’t worry about her. After all she is no longer a child .别为她担心。毕竟她不再是个小孩子了。
③I shall wait no longer.我不等了。
no longer 常可相当于not…any longer. not 用来否定谓语, any longer 置于句末。上面的句子可分别改作:
①He don’t live here any longer.
②Don’t worry about her. After all she isn’t a child any longer.
③I shall not wait any longer.
注意：no more（相当于not…any more）也是“不再”的意思。no longer是把现在的情况和过去对比，时态以现在时为多，有时也用过去时或将来时；no more 指今后如何，通常用将来时态。
①I can no longer stand it.我再也受不了。
②I will go there no more.我再也不到那地方去了。
美国人有时用起来比较随便。
He is no more/no longer ill.他的病好了。
另外：涉及数量或程度时要用no more; 谈到时间表示once but not now（有一度、曾经那样，但现在不了时），要用no longer.
①There is no more bread.没有面包了。
②I no longer support the Conservative Party.我不再支持保守党了。（曾经支持过）
2． not just…but…：not only…but(also)…（also可省略）不仅/不但……而……。
该句型可连接两个并列的主语、谓语、宾语、表语和状语，说话的侧重点在后一部分。当连接两个并列主语时，谓语应同靠近的主语在人称和数上取得一致。
①Not just you but he likes the country music very much.不但你，而且他也很喜欢乡村音乐。
②He can not just drive but repair a car.他不仅会开而且会修车。
③I like not just pop music but country music.我不仅喜欢流行音乐，而且喜欢乡村音乐。
④This book is not just interesting but also useful.这本书不但有趣而且有用。
⑤Lu Xun is famous not just in China but in the whole world.鲁迅不只在中国有名，而且在全世界都很著名。
3．……while playing the guitar.
时间和条件状语从句常常可以简化。这时引导从句的词常有：when/while/whenever/before/after/until/till/和if/unless/though,但简化必须符合下面两个条件。
（1）当从句与主句主语一致，且从句谓语有be的某种形式时，常可以把从句的主语及be省略掉。
①Be careful when(you are) crossing the street 过马路的时候要小心。
②While (he was)walking along the sands.Crusoe saw some footprints in the sand.克鲁索沿沙滩走着的时候，看到沙子上有些脚印。
③I won’t go to her party unless(I am) invited.要是不受到邀请，我就不去参加她的宴会。
④He knows many things though(he is)very young.他年龄不大，但知道的事不少。
（2）当从句为it is + adj.时，也常将it is省略掉。
①When (it is)possible,I’ll go to Beijing to see you.可能的时候，我将去北京看你。
②If (it is)necessary, I’ll come tomorrow.必要的话，明天我就来。
4．It is/was + adj. + for/of sb.+ to do sth.某人做某事是…….
该句的It 为形式主语，真正的主语是后面的不定式（短语），for/of sb.是不定式的逻辑主语。能用于该句型的形容词常有：（1）important/ unimportant/ necessary/ possible/ impossible/ hard/ difficult/ easy/ useful/ usual/ unusual等。这些形容词的后面常用for来表示不定式的逻辑主语。
①It’s important(for you)to learn English well.(你们)学好英语很重要。
②It’s not easy for them to finish the work within three hours.对他们来说3小时内完成这项工作很难。
（2）right/ wrong/ clever/ foolish/ stupid/ nice/ kind/ rude/ polite/ impolite等。这些形容词的后面常用of 介词短语表示不定式的逻辑主语。
①It’s kind of you to help us.你们帮助我们真是太好了。
②It’s impolite of a person to interrupt people while they are talking.打断别人谈话的人是不礼貌的。
5.so far迄今为止；到现在为止。通常用现在完成时连用，so far可置于句首、句中或句末。
①So far we have learned English for six years.到今年我们已经学了6年英语了。
②Your work has been good so far this year.今年迄今为止你的工作很出色。
③ We haven’t heard from Tom so far.至今我们还没收到汤姆的来信。
6．the + 比较级，the + 比较级 越……，就越……。
①The busier he is ,the happier he feels。越忙他越高兴。
②The harder you work, the greater progress you’ll make.你学习越努力，取得的进步就越大。
③The more hppily we live,the more we realize how much we owe to the Party。我们过得越幸福，就会更加认识到共产党的恩情。
④The more I hear, the more I laugh.越听我笑得越厉害。
7．Of + n.（抽象句词）相当于该名词相应的形容词，在句中可用作表语或补语。
能用于该句型的名词有：help/ use/ value/ importance等。其对应的形容词分别为：helpful/ useful/ valuable/ important.
①This book is of great use/ very useful.这本书很有用。
②His advice is of great value/ very valuable.他的建议很有价值。
③English is of great importance/ very important to us.英语对我们来说很重要。
三、经典名题导解
题1（NMET ）
You’ll find this map of great___________ in helping you to get round London.
A. price B. cost C. value D. usefulness
分析：C。“be of + 抽象名词”；句意为“你会发现这张地图对帮助你在伦敦旅游大有益处”，A，B 不合句意。D为可数名词。Value为抽象名词，意为“益处、价值”。
题2(上海 1998)
The lady said she would buy a gift for her daughter with the________.
A.20 dollars remained . B.remaining 20 dollars.
C.remained 20 dollars. D.20 dollars to remain
分析：B。 remaining adj.剩下的。the remaining students剩下的学生。the remaining 11 seats 剩下的11个座位。
题3 Tom was disappointed that most of the guests_____ when he_____ at the party.
A.left; had arrived B.left; arrived
C.had left; had arrived D.had left; arrived
分析：D。句中was决定从句必须使用与过去相关的时态，leave的动作先于arrive，所以用过去完成时态。
题4（NMET ）
I wonder why Jenny____ us recently. We should have heard from her by now.
A.hasn’t written B.doesn’t write
C.won’t write D.hadn’t written
分析：A。该题考查现在完成时用法。题干中有recently“最近”一词。
题5（上海 ）
Those T-shirts are usually $ 35 each, but today they have a _____ price of $ 19 in the Shopping Center.
A.regular B.special C.cheap D.particular
分析：B。对于price只能用high,low修饰，不能用cheap;根据句中可以看出，“19美元对照35美元”是“特价”，故选择B。
题6（NMET ）
It’s always diffcult being in a foreign country, ______ if you don’t speak the language.
A．extremely B．naturally C．basically D．especially
分析：D。该题考查四个副词的区别。从句意很容易判断出especially“尤其是、特别是”,符合题意。
题7 It was about 600 years ago____ the first clock with a face and an hour hand was made.
A．that B．until C．before D.when
分析A。这是一个强调句，强调的部分是about 600 years ago.其结构为“it is+被强调部分that+剩余部分”。一般来讲，把it is...that...去掉之后原句应不改变原意。
题8 It is careless _______ you to do that.
A．for B．to C．of D．with
分析：C。此题考查动词不定式作主语。在这个结构中，只能用of或for介绍逻辑主语。由于本题介词后的逻辑主语 you可以与careless连用，即：You are careless.所以选C.如不能，则用for.
四、课后巩固训练
Ⅰ、单项填空
A）从A、B、C、D四个选项中，找出划线部分与所给单词的划线部分读音相同的选项。
1.regret A.reuse B.recycle C.reread D.report
2.forget A.sort B.forbit C.sort D.forward
3.glove A.move B.lovely C.prove D.improve
4.technique A.character B.church C.teach D.touch
5.upwards A.warm B.law C.draw D.product
B）从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳答案。
6. He_______me that I had done it before.
A.remembered B.remided C.reported D.warns
7. The two strangers talked as if they_______friends for years.
A.should be B.would be C.have been D.had been
8. When a pencil is partly in a glass of water,it looks as if_______.
A.breaks B.has broken C.were broken D.had been broken
9. The boy is not old_______to school.
A.to go B.enough not to go C.enough to go D.enough going
10. If we work with a strong will,we can overcome any difficulty,_______great it is.
A.what B.how C.however D.whatever
11. -Listen to me,please
-No.No matter_______you say,I won’t give up.
A.how B.which C.what D.whatever
12. You may dress_______you please.
A.however B.whenever C.whoever D.whichever
13. No matter_______I want to buy a car,I can’t afford one.
A.how hard B.how much C.what D.however
14. He made a speech at the meeting,_______with folk music.
A.doing B.dealing C.to do D.to deal
15. When and where and how to store the waste_______still a problem.
A.were B.are C.is D.have been
16. Your must_______all your worries and have a good rest.
A.get out B.get away C.get rid of D.get in
17. When the siol becomes too hard.we_______it_______.
A.break;up B.break;down C.break;into D.break;out
18. If you continue to work like that,you’ll_______sooner or later.
A.break up B.break down C.fall down D.turn down
19. -Are you going.
-_______.
A.All depend B.It all depends C.That depends D.B and C
20. He had a high fever when he was three,_______him completely blind.
A.to make B.making C.to leave D.left
21. We should constantly_______advice from the masses.
A.seek B.seek for C.seek after D.seek out
22. Much energy is wasted_______things that are thrown away.
A.to produce B.producing C.doing D.making of
23. _______the old man used to climb the hill.
A.At a time B.At one time C.At no time D.At the time
24. The lady_______a baby last night.It weighted seven pounds_______.
A.gave birth to;at birth B.wore;by birth
C.had;by birthD.come out;at birth
25. It will be four hours_______he arrives.
A.since B.before C.when D.after
Ⅱ、完形填空（共25小题，每小题1分，满分25分）
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从四个选项中，选出一个最佳答案。
One evening a police officer was driving along a road.He was on 26 and was wearing 27 clothes.Suddenly,he saw two 28 running out of a building.He 29 someone shouting,“Help!Help!Stop thief!”The police officer was 30 ,that the two men were thieves.He knew he must 31 them.However,he was not only 32 uniform(制服)but also unarmed.He 33 that if he got out of his 34 and tried to arrest(逮捕)them at least one of the men would 35 escape.The police officer was facing a 36 problem.He knew that he 37 let men escape,but how 38 he arrest them?
He thought quickly and had 39 .It involved(含有)danger and it might not work,but he 40 to try.
He drove his car up to the men and stopped 41 them.Then he put his 42 out of the window and asked,“Do you want a lift?”
“Yes,yes,”answered the men,and 43 got into his car,“please take us to the 44 station,”they told him.
“Very good,”the police officer said and 45 off.After a few minutes,one of them 46 out,“But this isn’t the way to the railway station.Where are you going?”“I must go this way,”the police officer 47 .“There’s a big fire and traffic is held up.You don’t want to sit in a traffic jam(阻塞),do you?”
“No,no”the men 48 “Please take us the quickest way.”
The next 49 ,the police officer had pulled up at the police station.He jumped out,shouted for 50 ,and seconds later,the two thieves were arrested.
26.A.duty B.guard C.task D.work
27.A.special B.evening C.police D.plain
28.A.robbers B.cheats C.thieves D.men
29.A.listened B.heard C.felt D.noticed
30.A.told B.afraid C.sure D.warned
31.A.follow B.catch C.shoot D.grasp
32.A.in B.on C.fit D.dressing
33.A.knew B.learned C.found D.asked
34.A.car B.bus C.house D.office
35.A.never B.easily C.hardly D.seldom
36.A.heavy B.new C.strange D.difficult
37.A.daren’t B.mustn’t C.might D.shouldn’t
38.A.need B.would C.could D.did
39.A.a way B.an idea C.a try D.a method
40.A.failed B.had C.decide D.managed
41.A.after B.behind C.before D.beside
42.A.head B.hand C.arm D.cap
43.A.slowly B.quickly C.luckly D.suddenly
44.A.space B.police C.railway D.radio
45.A.set B.got C.rode D.drove
46.A.ran B.cried C.found D.got
47.A.laughed B.shouted C.explained D.thought
48.A.refused B.agreed C.offered D.smiled
49.A.moment B.day C.week D.month
50.A.fun B.help C.anger D.joy
Ⅲ、阅读理解（共25小题，A节每小题2分，B节每小题1分，满分45分）
A）阅读下列短文，从每小题所给的四个选项中，选出一个最佳答案。
A
202W. 56th street
New York N.Y. 10012
May 17, 1998
Dear Mr Anderson,
I’m not sure you’ll remember me,but we met in Bethany last year.It was at your daughter’s wedding.Her husband David is an old friend of mine,and I came from New York for the wedding.You and I had a pleasant talk and I told you a little about my job as a reporter for the New York Times.You said that I should get in touch with you if I ever decided to come back to Bethany.
At that time I did like to stay in New York,but since then I have changed my mind and now I’d like to get a job back in my hometown.My problem is this---I have been away now for so long (since 1988) that I have no job contacts (门路) in Bethany.That’s why I’m writing to you now.I would appreciate(感激)it if you could put me in touch with anyone who could help me and advise me.It cost me quite a long time to decide to write to you like this,but any suggestion you might have would be appreciated.
My best wishes to you and Mrs.Anderson.
Sincerely
Patrick Neal
51. Patrick Neal was not sure that Mr.Anderson would remember him because_______.
A.they had not seen each other for a long time
B.they had never written to each other
C.they had only met once before
D.they didn’t live in the same city
52. Patrick Neal had been invited to Anderson’s daughter’s wedding because_______.
A.he was one of Anderson’s friends B.they had been neighbours
C.he knew Anderson’s daughter D.he was a friend of Anderson’s son-in-law
53. Patrick had been away from his hometown_______.
A.for ten years B.for less than nine years
C.since he met Anderson D.since he worked as a reporter
54. Patrick Neal asked Anderson to_______.
A.find a better job for him
B.introduce someone who might help him get a job in Bethany
C.give some advice about his job
D.help him in his work
55. Why did Patrick Neal decide to get a job in Bethany?_______.
A.Because his best friend was living there
B.Because he was brought up there
C.Because he thought he might get a better job in his hometown
D.Because he wasn’t used to living in New York
B
A taxi hit a truck.A policeman spoke to the taxi driver and to the truck driver. He also spoke to Tom,who was a witness(证人).This is what they said:
The truck driver:I was driving from the airport towards Newtown.A cat ran across the road.So I slowed down,I didn’t stop.A taxi hit the back of my truck.Luckily, nobody was seriously hurt.
Taxi driver:I was driving behind a truck several miles from Newtown.The truck stopped suddenly.The driver didn’t give me a warning,I was driving very carefully,I didn’t expect to catch up with the truck,because there was two buses coming near from Newtown.My taxi hit the truck,and my glass cut my left hand.
Tom:I was walking in the street less than a mile from the airport.A truck was going to Newtown.About 200 feet behind the truck followed a taxi.It was going fast. When the truck slowed down.The taxi hit it.The taxi driver wasn’t looking at the truck,but something out of the window instead.My friend saw the accident,too.
Tom’s friend nodded when the policeman asked him whether what Tom said was right or not.
56. The accident happened_______.
A.in Newtown B.at the airport
C.not far from Newtown D.not far from the airport
57. In the taxi driver’s opinion,_______.
A.he caused the accident B.a cat caused the accident
C.the truck driver caused the accident D.it was caused by the two buses
58. Suppose Tom told the truth,the accident was maybe caused by_______.
A.the policeman B.the taxi driver
C.the truck driverD.the two buses from Newtown
59. If what Tom said was wrong_______.
A.it would be difficult for the policeman to find out the truth
B.it was easy for the policeman to find out the truth
C.we could infer that Tom was an honest man
D.we could infer that the policeman had done wrong
60. When Tom’s friend was asked something about the accident,_______.
A.he refused to express his opinion
B.he pretended to know nothing
C.he agreed with Tom
D.he didn’t know how to answer the policeman’s questions
C
The first true piece of sports equipment that man invented was the ball.
In ancient Egypt,pitching stones was a favorite children’s game.But a badly thrown rock could hurt a child.Looking for something less dangerous to throw.The Egyptians made what were probably the first ball.
At first,balls were made of grass or leaves held together the first balls.Later they were made of piece of animal skin sewed together and stuffed(塞满)with feathers or hay.
Even though the Egyptians were warlike they found time for peaceful games.Before long they have developed a number of ball games each with its own set of rules. Perhaps they,played ball more for instruction than for fun.Ball playing was thought of mainly as a way to teach young men the speed and skill they need for war.
61. The ball was probably invented because_______.
A.throwing stones often caused injures B.throwing stones was not fun
C.games with stones was not fun D.rocks were too heavy to throw
62. The first balls were probably made of_______.
A.animal skins stuffed with rocks B.twist(缠绕)of hay
C.hides stuffed with hay or feathers D.grass and leaves tied with vines
63. This passage says that Egyptians played_______.
A.main different games with balls B.many different kinds of game
C.only one ball game D.different games with similar rules
64. The Egypians thought that ball playing was_______.
A.childish B.difficult C.not enjoyable D.worthwhile
65. The best title for paragraph is_______.
A.The First Ball Games
B.How Egyptian Children Played Games
C.The Beginning of Sports
D.Egyptian Sports
D
Sixty-year-old grandmother,Fiona McFee,is going to stop woring next year and she decided to realize a childhood dream and sail around the coast of Scotland in a small boat.Thought the inside of the boat is very cosy it has no running water of electricty.Fiona says she can live without these things but she plans to take her small CD player,her hot water bottle and a bag of books to make sure life isn’t too uncomfortable.
We asked her if she was afraid of being at sea for so long.She said,“Well,I’m going to take a good compass.Anyway I’m not afraid of death because I love the sea---I just hope it love me,”Fiona certainly has plenty of energy;in her spare time she enjoys playing the piano,rock-climbing,canoeing and dancing.Though she is sixty,she doesn’t want to have a quiet life“I’m looking forward to having fun in the rest of my life and that’s exactly why I’d like to be a sailor for a white”.
66. The word “cosy” in the first paragraph means_______.
A.bright B.dirty C.comfortable D.dark
67. When Fiona McFee said“I just hope it love me”,what she meant was_______.
A.of course,it loves me,since I love it
B.If I love it,it should love me
C.I hope it will bring me a safe sailing as a return for my love of it
D.I hope it will save my life when I am in time of danger
68. The reason why she would like to have the sail is that_______.
A.she thinks it will be very exciting
B.she likes sports and enjoys canoeing
C.she has decided to realize a childhood dream
D.she wants to be still active when she gets old
69. What kind of person would you say the old woman is?
A.Someone who doesn’t show what she is feeling
B.Someone who is very proud and sure of her success
C.Someone who dosen’t use her head much
D.Someone who is open,honest and brave
70. The best title for this paragraph is_______.
A.Life Begins at SixtyB.A Round Coast Sail
B.An Old Woman SailorD.An Unsual Hobby(爱好)
B）根据对话内容，从对话后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳答案。
A: Oh,we’ve got such a lot of homework again!
B: Yes, 71 .
A: I used to make a lot of models in my spare time,but I never have time now.
B: 72 By the way,have you finished your composition?
A: Yes. 73 I spent more than two and a half hours on it last night.
B: 74 I didn’t start it until half past eight last night because I had to do the
physics exercises first 75 I’ll have to finish it tongight.
A.Wonderful.
B.I used to watch TV a lot and I still spend a lot of time on it.
C.There wasn’t time to finish it.
D.I haven’t done it yet.
E.But it took me ages to write it.
F.And I used to watch TV a lot.But I’m too busy now with all this homework.
G.Terrible,isn’t it?
Ⅳ、单词拼写（共10小题，每小题1分，满分10分）
76.Man must conquer n_______.
77.On Saturdays they usually g_______ together and discuss some questions.
78.Many young people leave their villages to s_______ their fortune in cities.
79.Our teacher is skilled at using modern teaching t_______.
80.Don’t throw the r_______ everywhere.
81.They were _______(积极的) in politics.
82.Many materials like grass bottles should be _______(回收).
83.Putting on his rubber _______(手套) he began to give the operation.
84.First _______(分类) the books and then put them in place.
85.I love bread,freshly _______(烤).
Ⅴ、短文改错（共10小题，每小题1.5分）
Last summer my wife and I went to visit 86._______
the town in that we both grew up.We hadn’t been 87._______
there about ten years.First,we went to the 88._______
neighborhood where my wife cost her childhood. 89._______
The house that she was born in still there.And 90._______
same neighbours still lived next door.They let 91._______
us to come in and have a cup of hot coffee. 92._______
Then we all went to see my old neighbourhood. 93._______
How a disappointment!(失望)It was all changed.All the 94._______
old houses I remembered were missed and in their 95._______
place were new ones,I didn’t know any of the people who live there.
Ⅵ、书面表达（满分30分）
下面有六幅图画，描述了你三月六日（星期六）那天的活动，请根据这些图画用英语写一篇日记。
注意：1、日记须包括所有图画内容，可以当增加细节。使日记连贯。2、字数100字左右。
参考答案
1-10 DBBAD BDCCC 11-20 CABBC CABDB 21-30 ABBAB ADDBC 31-40 DABCD BCBAB
41-50 DABCD BCBAB 51-60 CDABB DCBAC 61-70 ADADA CCDDA 71-75 GFEDC
76.nature 77.gathered 78.seed 79.techniques 80.rubbish 81.active
82.recycled 83.gloves 84.sort 85.baked
86.√ 87.that-which 88.about-about for 89.cost-spent 90.still-was still
91.same-the same92.去掉to93.all-both 94.How-What
95.missed-missing
Ⅵ、One possible version:
March 6th, Saturday
Fine
This morning,I was walking down the road to the park when I saw a boy fall down from his bike to the ground.I hurried up to help him.And I found his left leg was hurt badly,I carried him onto his bike and took him to a hospital.In the hospital, while a doctor was examining him.I made a phone call to the boy’s parents.And soon they came.They thanked me again and again.Now the evening came,I had to say goodbye to them.When I walked home,I felt happy though I couldn’t go to the park today.
篇2：高考英语第一轮总复习讲座之十六（SBⅡ-Units 5-6）
一、单元考点提示
1.词汇
line appearence
set storm
film director
siage bury
uncertain lifetime
search wooden
mouthful excite
manager honour
particular silent
act shape
ring collection
bank material
cheaply pack
hide shame
penny coin
trade silver
possible mine
whenever whatever
afford
2.句型
set off 动身，启程
in a hurry 匆忙地，很快地
have on 穿着，戴着
pick out 挑出
in(one’s)search 寻求；寻找
bring up 教育；培养
so far 至目前为止
hand out 分发
here and there 到处
look through 仔细查看
sooner or later 迟早
pick up 收集；买到
plenty of 大量的
date from 始于……
mix…with… 把……和……搅拌（混合）
trade with sb. 与某人做买卖
3.语法
be of this kind
One of the most delicious meals that he has ever enjoyed.
What a pity/ What a shame…
It’s a pity that…
It’s great fun…
be of +(大小、形状、重量、新旧、颜色等)名词
4.交际英语
What do you do?(表示询问职业)
Could you…?（表示请求）
电话用语：遗憾的表达方式。
二、考点精析与拓展
1. search;search for; look for
(1)search指“搜查某地或搜身”，其宾语可以是房屋、人身、衣袋等名词。如：
They searched their homes without any reason.他们毫无理由地搜查了他们的家。
They searched him but found nothing.他们搜了他的身，但没有找到什么。
(2)search for 则指“搜寻、搜索某人或物”。如：
They searched for him everywhere.他们到处搜寻他。
The police searched the wood for the lost child.警察在树林里寻找走失的孩子。
试比较：They searched his clothes.他们搜查了他的衣服。（看是否藏有东西）
They searched for his clothes.他们在搜寻他的衣服。（要找到衣服）
另外，search也可用做名词，in search of “寻找、寻求”是个常见短语。如：
The boys went in search of something to eat.孩子们去找东西吃。
(3)look for意为“寻找”，同search for意义大体相同。但search for 意味较强，用很大注意力搜寻。而look for则较为通俗，常用于日常用语。如:
I looked for my missing pen everywhere.我到处找我丢失的那支笔。
2. be certain…; be sure
be uncertain about意思是“对……不确定（没把握）”
uncertain的词根是certain,意思是“确信的，有把握的”，常用于以下结构：
(1)be certain(sure) to do sth.“肯定会做……”（表示某事将要发生）。如：
He is certain(sure) to come next Sunday.
(2)be certain(sure) of/ about sth.“确信、有把握”（表示某个人的思想状态）。如：
We are certain/ sure of victory.
(3)名词从句作主语时，一般多用certain.
It is certain that he will come.
3. “喜欢”的表示方法
英语中，表示“喜欢”的动词或词组有若干个，它们的语气强弱不同，有重有轻，意思也不完全一样，下面分别举例说明：
(1)love 意为“热爱”，指引起深厚的、强烈的感情的爱，并有一种依附意，语气最重。如：
His mother,whom he loved deeply,died when he was only a small boy.他深深爱戴着他的母亲，当他小的时候，她与世长辞了。
I love doing comedies .我喜欢演喜剧。
(2)be fond of 表示“喜欢” “热爱”，也表示对某人或某事有感情，语气次于“love”。如：
Ants are fond of sweet food.蚂蚁喜欢吃甜食。
I’m fond of this child.我喜欢这个小孩。
(3)care for意为“喜欢、对……有兴趣”。如：
The girl cares much for new clothes.这个女孩很喜欢新衣服。
They do not care very greatly for art.他们对艺术不是很感兴趣。
(4)like意为“喜欢”，指不反感，但不引起强烈的感情和迫切的愿意，反义词为dislike.如：
Do you like reading?你喜欢阅读吗？
I like to read in bed.我喜欢在床上看书。
(5)enjoy意为“欣赏”“喜欢”，具有满足感，如：
I enjoy foreign music.我喜欢外国音乐。
Most students enjoy asking questions in English.大部分学生喜欢用英语问问题。
(6)go in for“喜欢（做某类事）、有某种习惯或做法”。如：
What sports do you go in for?你喜欢哪些体育运动？
We don’t go in for that sort of thing.我们不喜欢那种事情。
4. 用不定式或动名词意义不同
(1) 有些动词+动词不定式或动名词，意思上没有区别。如：begin,start,like,love,prefer,hate,continue等。
Do you like playing(to play) chess?你喜欢下棋吗？
I prefer making(to make) an outline before I make a speech.我喜欢讲话之前先拟一个提纲。
但有时这些动词后用动名词表示一般倾向，用不定式表示特定的一次动作。如：
I like reading novels, but don’t like to read this novel.我喜欢看小说，但不喜欢看这一本小说。
(2)有些动词后 + 动词不定式或动名词意义不同。
①remember to do something记住做某事（动作未发生）
remember doing something记得做过某事（动作已发生），如：
I must remember to close the window when I have the room.我必须记住在我离开房间时把窗户关上。
I remember closing the window when I left the room.我记得离开房间时我已关上了窗户。
②forget to do something忘记做某事
forget doing something已做过某事但忘记了，如：
Don’t forget to turn off the light.不要忘了关灯。
He forgot posting the letter for me, though he really did.尽管他替我寄了信，但忘记了。
③regret to do something对要做的事感到遗憾
regret doing something对做过的事后悔，如：
I regret to tell you that you failed in the exam.我遗憾地告诉你考试没有及格。
He regrets saying that to her.他很后悔对她讲那件事。
④try to do sth.尽力/设法做某事
try doing sth.试着做某事，如：
We must try to finish it on time.我们必须尽力准时完成它。
Why not try doing it in a new way?为什么不试着用新的办法来做它呢？
⑤mean to do something打算做某事
mean doing something意味着，如：
What do you mean to do with it?你打算怎样对付它呢？
My words don’t mean hurting you.我的话并不意味着伤害你。
⑥stop to do something停下原来做的事，开始做另一件事
stop doing something停止正在做的事，如：
He stopped to talk with the teacher.他停下来和老师谈话。
He stopped talking with the teacher.他停止了和老师的谈话。
⑦go on to do something做完某事改做其他事（或在做某事过程中停了一段时间后继续做该事）
go on doing something继续做一直做的事（中间未停顿），如：
He went on to show us how to do it in a different way.他接着又教我们用另一种方法做这件事。
He went on talking as if nothing had happened.他若无其事地继续讲下去。
⑧can’t help(to)do something不能帮助做某事。
Can’t help doing something禁不住要做某事，如：
I couldn’t help(to)finish your homework.我不能帮你完成作业。
When the mother saw her lost son, she couldn’t help crying.当母亲看到她失而复得的儿子时，情不自禁地哭起来。
⑨另，consider sb.to be/to have done把……看做；认为，consider后为不定式的，复合结构时，to be可省略。
consider doing something考虑做某事，如：
We consider Lincoln(to be) a great man.我们都认为林肯是个伟人。
I consider him to have passed the exam. 我认为他已通过考试。
⑩另，be afraid to do something不敢做某事
be afraid of doing something害怕做某事，如：
They are afraid to tell me the truth.他们不敢告诉我真相。
The students are afraid of breaking glass.学生们害怕打碎杯子。
5. as;which引导定语从句异同
as, which 都能引导限制性或非限制性的定语从句。
(1)在引导限制性定语从句时；
①which从句修饰的先行词是名词（词组），which可与that换用，作宾语时可省去。如：
Then grow some tomatoes in one box which has plant food in the soil and some in another box which doesn’t.
But the studios(which)he started are still busy today,producing
more and more interesting films.
②as从句的先行词是the same/such或被the same/such修饰；as可作主、宾、表语，一律不可省略。如：
Many of the sports were the same as they are now.（as作表语）
He uses the same map as I (use).他和我用的是同一份地图。（as作宾语）
Such as beautiful park as is being built was designed by two young engineers.正在建造的如此漂亮的公园是由两个年轻的工程师设计的。（as作主语）
The printed newspaper was not such as the chief editor had expected. 印好的报纸并非如主编原来所期望的那样。（as作宾语）
(2)在引导非限制性定语从句时，as,which都可作主、宾、表语，都不可省去。
①which从句补充说明先行词的用途、性质、状态、特征等。如：
At present,the biggest nature park for milu deer in China is in the Nanhaizi Milu Park,which is about 20 kilometres south of Beijing.(位置)
China Daily has plenty of advertisements, which help to cut
the costs of making the newspaper.(用途)
One of Charile Chaplin’s most famous films was“The Gold Rush”,which was made in 1925.(时间)
Now, however,the maters of this great lake,which is also the
World’s deepest(over 1,740 metres),have been dirtied by waste
from a chemical factory.(特征)
②which从句还可表示说话人的看法，也可对主句作意义上的补充；which=and it/ this/ that/ they;which代表的是先行词、主句或主句的一部分；which从句只能放在先行词或主句后。如：
He said she could speak 4 foreign languages, which(=and it)is not true.他说她会四门外语，这是不可能的。（说话人看法，which代表宾语从句部分）
比较：He said she could speak 4 foreign languages, which(=and that)surprised every one of us.他说她会四门外语，这使我们每个人都很惊讶。（补充主句，which 代表主句）
③as也可代表先行词、主句或主句一部分。但as有“正如”的意义，其从句可放在主句前或后，如：
The Nanjing Changjiang River Bridge,as we all know, was compl-
eted in 1969.我们都知道南京长江大桥，它建成于一九六九年。（as代表先行词）
To shut your eyes to facts, as many of you do, is foolish.(如)你们许多人（所做的那样）对事实视而不见是愚蠢的。（as代表主语部分）
6. would like; should like
(1)两个短语均指“想要……”，与want同义，但would(should)like的语气较want婉转或客气。
(2)would like 可用于各种人称；而should like则主要用于第一人称。例如：
He would(不用should)like to be a doctor.他希望当大夫。
We would(不用should)like to hear your views about it.我们想听听你对这个问题的看法。
(3)在疑问句中常用would like,而不用should like。例如：
What would you like for breakfast?你早饭想吃什么？
(4)这两个短语常常简略为’d like,后面可接名词、代词或动词不定式，不接动名词。例如：
Would you like to leave a message?你要不要留话？
误：Would you like leaving a message?
(5)在省略回答中，would like to 中的to 不可省略，只省略to后面的词语（但be 除外）。例如：
①-Would you like to join us tonigh?
-Oh, I’d like to (join you),but I have a friend to see off at the station.
② -Would you like to be a singer?
-Yes,I’d like to be (a singer).
7. shape;form; figure
这组名词都有“形状”的意思。
shape 着重指人或物等的比较具体的整个外形，不太正式；form指有实体结构和看得见的某种特殊形状或是抽象的形式；figure指物时，侧重指轮廊，指人时，着重指姿态。如：
Coins may be of different sizes,weights, shapes, and of diff-
erent metals. 硬币可能大小、轻重、形状不同，铸造的金属也可能不一样。
The shape of Italy is like a leg.意大利国的形状像一条腿。
Change these sentences into the Present Perfect Passive,putting the verbs into the correct forms.用动词的正确形式将下面的句子变成现在完成时的被动语态 。
Ice,snow and steam are forms of water.冰、雪、蒸气是水的几种形态。
You can see the tall stone figures and visit the temples of the gods.你可以看到那些高大的石雕像，参观那些神殿。
这组名词也可当动词用，shape意为“使什么东西具有某种具体的外
形”，常有“塑造”等具体意义；form指通过协商、组织等形成某种习惯、计划或组织等，一般相当于“形成”;figure通常指象征某事物。
8.be of…结构小结
(1)be of + 表示年龄（age）、大小（size）、颜色（color）、重量（weight）、高度（height）、价格（price）、意见（opinion）、形状（shape）、种类（kind）和方法（way）等名词，说明主语的特征，of表示“具有”之意，有时可省去。例如：
They are both of middle height.他俩都是中等个儿。
When I was of your age, I was a teacher.当我是你这个年龄时，我当老师了。
These flowers are of different colors.这些花朵颜色不同。
Tom is of a different way of thinking.汤姆的思维方式与别人不同。
注意：此结构中，如果of后面的名词前有不定冠词a/an，则a/an=the same.例如：
The two boys are of an/the same age.这两个男孩同龄。
These bottles are of a/the same size.这些瓶子大小一样。
(2)be of + 物质名词，表示主语是由某材料制成或某成分构成，相当于be made of, be built of或be made up of等。例如：
The necklace is(made)of glass.这项链是玻璃制的。
The bridge is (built)of stone.这桥是由石头构筑的。
Our class is (made up)of over 50 students. 我班有50多个学生。
(3)be of + 抽象名词（如value, importance,use, help等），of表示“具有、具备”等意思，of不能省，这一结构相当于be+该抽象名词相应的形容词。例如：
They are of great help/ very helpful to learners of English.他们对英语学习者来说是很有帮助的。
In fact, sports and games can be of great value/very valuable.事实上体育运动是很有价值的。
The book is of no use/useless to us.这书对我们无用。
It is of great importance/very important to study English.学习英语很重要。
因此，根据上述(1),(2)点可以看出，课文句中第一个be of 结构表示“具有”，第二个be of(承前省去be)表示“由……制成的”。全句汉语意思为：“硬币的大小、重量、形状可能各不相同，并由不同的金属制成。”
9. whatever用法小结
whatever 是一种用法较特殊的代词，兼有连接词和关系词的作用，主要有以下三种用法：
(1)引导主语从句和宾语从句，意思是“凡是……的事物(=anything that)”.
Whatever I have is yours.我所有的东西就是你的。(主语从句)
Go to stamp sales and buy whatever you can afford.到邮票销售处去把你能买得起的邮票都买下来。（宾语从句）
She would tell him whatever news she got.她会把所听到的任何消息都告诉他。（宾语从句）
Talk to me about whatever is troubling you.把任何使你烦恼的事都对我谈谈。（介词宾语从句）
whatever在这类从句中可作主语、宾语、定语等。
(2)引导状语从句，多表示让步，意思是“不管什么、无论怎样”。如：
Don’t change your plans, whatever happens.无论怎样，你都别改变计划。
Whatever I am, it’s useful to know foreign languages.无论我做什么工作，懂外语总是有用的。
So don’t lose heart, whatever you do。因此无论你做什么，都不要丧失信心。
Whatever the old man was like, most of his scientific work was sound.无论那位老人怎么样，他大部分的科研工作是好的。
You have to go on,whatever difficulties you meet.无论你遇到什么困难，你都必须干下去。
Whatever在这类从句中可作主语、表语、宾语、介词宾语、定语等。
这类句中的某些成分还可以省略。如：
The country is always beautiful whatever the season(is).无论哪个季节，这个国家总是很美。
10.感叹句表达方式
感叹句表示说话时的惊讶、喜悦、赞赏和愤怒等情绪。大多数感叹句是由what和how引导，其句型结构为“What(或How)+感叹部分+主语+谓语！”。也有少量其他形式的感叹句，现一并归纳如下：
(1)What 引导的感叹句
What 用做定语，修饰名词，其引导的感叹句句型结构为：
①What+a(an)+可数名词单数+主语+谓语！如：
What an orphan he is!他是个多么可怜的孤儿啊！
②What+a (an)+形容词+可数名词单数+主语+谓语！如：
What a beautiful voice she has!她的声音多美啊！
③What+形容词+可数名词复数+主语+谓语！如：
What kind doctors they are!他们是多好的医生啊！
④What+形容词+不可数名词+主语+谓语！如：
What good news it is!
(2)How 引起的感叹句
How 用做状语，修饰形容词、副词和动词，其引导的感叹句句型结构为：
①How+形容词+主语+谓语！
How clever you are!
②How+副词+主语+谓语！
How well she dances!
③How +形容词+a(an)+可数名词单数+主语+谓语！如：
How good a student he is!
④How+主语+谓语！如：
How the teachers worked!教师们工作多么努力啊！
⑤How+many(few)+可数名词的复数+主语+谓语！如：
How many books you have read!
⑥How much(little)+不可数名词+主语+谓语！如：
How little money the coat cost!
(3)“What+a(an)+形容词+可数名词单数+主语+谓语！”句型可转换为“How+形容词+a(an)+可数名词单数+主语+谓语！”句型。如；
What a clever boy he is!
How clever a boy he is!
(4)感叹句常将主语和谓语动词省略，以“What+名词！”或“How+形容词！”的形式构成。如：
What a fine student!
What mountains!
How wonderful!
How brave!
(5)其他形式的感叹句
有时候，可不用what和how来表示感叹，而用陈述句、疑问句、祈使句，甚至一个词或词组来表示感叹。如：
She is such a nice girl!她是一个多好的姑娘啊！（陈述句）
Who do you think you are!你算老几！（疑问句）
“Stop the train! Stop the train!”(祈使句)
Wonderful!(一个词)
Happy New Year!(词组)
三、精典名题导解
题1 （NMET 1995）
When a pencil is partly in a glass of water, it looks as if it _______.
A. breaks B. has broken C. were broken D. had been broken
分析：C。因句意表达的是“铅笔部分放于水中”所出现的状态，即“看上去像折掉了一样”，所以空白处应用虚拟语气。
题2 （NMET ）
The two strangers talked as if they _______ friends for years.
A. should be B. would be C. have been D. had been
分析：D。从talked一词可知是过去情况的虚拟形式。
题3 The sun is the centre of the universe, __________ we all know.
A. for B. as C. that D. what
分析：B。as可以引导非限制性定语从句，经常与know连用，as代替前面一句话，即，先行词是一句话。
题4 He paid the boy washing ten windows, most of _________ hadn’t been cleaned for at least a year.
A. these B. those C. that D. which
分析：D。从句中的逗号可以判断，横线上缺少一个关系代词引导定语从句，that不能作介词宾语。
题5 （NMET 2000）
These wild flowers are so special that I would do__________I can to save them.
A. whatever B. that C. which D. whichever
分析：A。句中I can后省略了do.即应为I can do to save them, do后没有宾语，所以应用whatever,意为“任何事情、不论什么”。
题6 (上海 2002)
There’s a feeling in me_________We’ll never know what a UFO is-not ever.
A. that B. which C. of which D. what
分析：A。that的先行词是a feeling in me ,是一个定语从句。
题7 It’s no use _______the small matters again.
A. discuss about B. to discuss
C. discussing D. having a discussion
分析：C。It’s not use doing sth…做某事没有用。
题8 Very few can_______ the difference between the two words.
A. speak B. say C. tell D. talk
分析：C。四个选项在词意上有区别。speak(讲)和say(说)均为不及物动词；tell(告诉)为及物动词；talk(谈话)为不及物动词。tell和can或can’t 连用，表示“分辨”。
四、课后巩固训练
第Ⅰ卷 （三部分， 共115分）
1. What are they complaining about?
A. The size of the room B. Long working hours. C. The hot weather.
2. Why can’t Professor Hill answer her question now?
A. He will only be free in the afternoon.
B. It's not his office hour.
C. He doesn't have time.
3. What does the man mean?
A. He doesn’t know how to begin to write a play.
B.He isn’t sure what the first part is about.
C. He doesn’t understand the play at all.
4. How many countries has the woman been to so far?
A. Four. B. Three. C. Two.
5. Where does the man want to go?
A. The police station. B. The city library. C. The supermarket.
第二节 （共15小题；每小题1.5分，满分22.5分）
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前，你将有时间阅读各个小题，每小题5秒钟；听完后，各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料，回答第6至8题。
6. What does Tom usually have for lunch?
A. A cup of coffee and some chicken.
B. A sandwich and a cup of coffee.
C. Sandwiches and some fruit.
7. Why doesn't he want to eat anything for dinner sometimes?
A. Because he wants to lose weight.
B. Because he is too tired.
C. Because he has no time.
8.What does the woman suggest?
A. Have a good rest. B. Eat less. C. Sleep more
听第7段材料，回答第9至11题。
9. Where is the man living?
A. 17. Mallett Street. B. 70 Mallett Street. C. 17 Marett street.
10. Which house is on fire?
A. Number 16. B. Number 18. C. Number 20.
11. Why is there nobody in the house on fire?
A. They went shopping.
B. They went to work.
C. They went abroad on holiday.
听第8段材料 ，回答第12至14题。
12. Why was the man kept in hospital?
A. His left leg was broken.
B. He was seriously ill.
C. His left arm was broken.
13. How did the accident happen?
A. Someone knocked into the back of his car.
B. He had drunk too much and lost his control.
C. He drove too fast.
14.Where was the man going that day?
A. He was going to work.
B. He was going home.
C. He was going to a party.
听第9段材料，回答第15至17题。
15. What is the man going to do?
A.Take a flight for Japan.
B. Drive the woman to the hotel.
C. Meet a guest at the airport.
16. Where will Mr Black stay after his arrival?
A. At a hotel.
B. At the man's house.
C. At the woman's house.
17. Why does the man want to leave a good impression?
A. To repay Mr Black's kindness.
B. To get invited back to Tokyo.
C. To increase the hotel's business.
听第10段材料，回答第18至20题。
18. Which car was badly damaged?
A. A car outside the supermarket.
B. A car at the bottom of the hill.
C. Paul's car.
19. Where was the driver of the sports car when the accident happened?
A. Inside the car.
B. In the supermarket. C. In the garage.
20. Who did Paul think was to blame for the accident?
A. The driver of the sports car.
B. The two girls inside the car.
C. The bus driver.
第二部分 英语知识运用（共两节，满分45分）
第一小节 单项填空 （共15小题；每小题1分，满分15分）
从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
21.-Look! You've made the same mistake again!
-Oh, not again! such a mistake.
A. I will always make B. I'm always making
C. I've always made D. I always made
22. Our flight was by the thick fog. So we didn't attend the meeting on time.
A. broken off B. kept up C. taken up D. held up
23. Our bad living habits will destroy the earth. Only by changing we live can we save the earth.
A. that B. what C. how D. where
24. Had I known that air conditioners cause so much pollution, I would never have bought .
A. one B. that C. those D. it
25. -I cannot thank you enough for the present you sent me.
- .
A. No, thanks B. With pleasure
C. My pleasure D. Please don’t say so
26. Among the most important questions people want is “how to keep the present economic growth without causing damage to the environment?”
A. answer B. being answered C. answered D. answering
27. If people had left things they were, there would be no damage to the animal and plant life there.
A. when B. since C. where D. as
28. It seems that the Chinese parents don't care what a hard life they themselves live, but are determined that their sons and daughters receive .
A. the possible best education B. the best possible education
C. the education best possible D. the education possible best
29. earliest English poetry was written in kind of English that is now difficult to understand.
A. The; the B. The ; a C. The ; 不填 D. A; a
30. nice and delicious, the roast ducks in this shop are always sold out soon.
A. Tasting B. Tasted C. Being tasted D. To taste
31. -Why you leave right now? Don’t you know it’s raining heavily outside?
-I know, but my parents are expecting me.
A. should B. must C. will D. won't
32. Today, if you find something useful on the Internet, you can download and it in your personal computer file ( 文档).
A. save B. spare C. share D. turn
33. Americans don't like using Mr., Mrs. or Miss. So, if they don't use your last name or titles, that really doesn't mean any .
A. lack respect B. lacking respect
C. lacking respecting D. lack of respect
34. Mr. Brown has three children, one of whom is a child of six, twins of twelve.
A. another B. other C. the others D. others
35. -Let's hurry. Doctor Susan is coming!
-Oh, I was afraid that we
A. will miss her B. already miss her
C. had already missed her D. have already missed her
二、完形填空 （共20小题；每小题1.5分，满分30分）
阅读下短文，掌握其大意，然后从36-55各题所给的四个选项（A，B，C，D）中选出一个最佳选项。
All kinds of people come in to have their shoes shined. Most folks are friendly. But this man was different.
“How much do you make a week, boy?” he asked me. I felt he was 36 at me.
He kept giving a sharp 37 around every now and then. All the time I kept 38 where I'd seen his face. Suddenly I knew. I’d seen his 39 in the post many times. He was the big robber: 40 by the police in three states!
“You know,”he was saying, “it's imagination people lack. You'll never get 41 as a shoeshine boy. ”
I kept brushing away on his shoes as 42 as I could. The sooner I finished, the better. He said, “When I was sixteen, I had 43 $ 2,500 of my own. ”
That reminded me of something. Was it $ 2,500 or $ 5,000 or $ 25,000? I wasn't
44 . I knew a big reward was 45 for him.
But what could I do about it? 46 him with a can of shoe polish? A man his 47 could grind (碾碎) me into the floor. If only someone would come in !
He kept talking away. “Along with 48 , it takes courage. The courage to take a chance. Start something on a shoestring. ”
Suddenly I saw Officer Dailey 49 across the street. Then, real fast, I began tightening the man's shoestrings.
The policeman was at the window when I cried out, “Officer Dailey, 50 !This
man's a robber. ”
“ 51 ,” the man shouted angrily. He started to jump off the stand. But he didn't
go the 52 he planned. He fell flat on his face and knocked himself out cold.
“That was pretty 53 of you,”the officer said. “You'll get a reward of $ 7, 500 for him. ”
Well, it really wasn’t my 54 ,” I said. “It was his. He told me if you had courage and imagination you could start something 55 on a shoestring”.
36. A. staring B. looking C. laughing D. pointing
37. A. look B.walk C. word D. tongue
38. A. considering B. remembering C. caring D. wondering
39. A. notice B.picture C. mail D. warning
40. A. wanted B. searched C . caught D. shown
41. A. anything B. something C. anywhere D. somewhere
42. A. carefully B. slowly C. well D. fast
43. A. made B. stolen C. borrowed D. gathered
44. A. curious B. sure C. interested D. clear
45. A. afforded B. offered C. suggested D. shown
46. A. Injure B. Warn C. Hit D. Avoid
47. A. size B. age C. height D. kind
48. A. money B. support C. cleverness D. imagination
49. A. wandering B. looking C. coming D. speeding
50. A. help B. danger C. stop D. attention
51. A. Mind you B. Shut up C. Hurry up D. Hands up
52. A. method B. position C. manner D. way
53. A. clever B. brave C. helpful D. lucky
54. A. business B. idea C. reward D. praise
55. A. small B. valuable C. important D. big
第三部分： 阅读理解 （共20小题；每小题2分，满分40分）
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项。
A
Japanese people, who never miss a chance to be photographed, were lining up to get their pictures on a postage stamp. Vanity (虚荣) stamps with personal photographs went on sale for the first time in Japan as part of an international postage stamp exhibition. The customer’s photo is taken with a digital camera and then printed on stamp sheets, a process that takes about five minutes. Sold in a sheet of 10 stamps for $ 8.80, little more than the cost of lunch in Tokyo, each stamp printed a different scene from a traditional painting along with the photo.
The stamps can be used normally to mail a letter, and postal officials hope they will help encourage interest in letter-writing in the Internet age. “Certainly e-mail is a useful method of communication, but letters are fun in a different way, “said Hatsumi Shimizu, an official in the Post Ministry. “We want to show young people that letters can be fun too. “
While similar stamp sheets appeared in Australia in 1999 and are now sold in some 12 nations and territories, Japan’s fondness for commemorative photos is likely to make them especially popular here. Indeed, officials had prepared 1,000 sheets but they were sold out in less than 30 minutes. Although the stamps are currently only available as a special service during the exhibition, postal a regular basis in the future.
56. The best title of this passage might be .
A. Never Miss a Chance to be Photographed
B. Your Own Face on a Postage Stamp
C. First Japanese Postage Stamps with a Photo
D. Letters are as Fun as E-mails
57. By saying “little more than the cost of lunch in Tokyo”the author really means .
A.this service is not very expensive
B.the cost of this service is very high
C.food in Tokyo is very dear
D.$ 8.80 is a very small amount of money
58. The purpose of this activity is .
A. to make the international postage stamp exhibition more interesting
B. to make more stamps for normal use
C. to draw interest in writing letters
D. to satisfy Japan's fondness of commemorative photos
59. Which of the following is true according to the passage?
A. Japanese people like to take photos.
B. This kind of stamps must be used to mail letters.
C. Japanese people can get this kind of stamps easily after the stamp exhibition.
D. This service is more popular in Japan than in other places.
B
Women work harder than men at university and get better degrees as a result, according to a study carried out at Burnel University.
The research, which tracked 200 students over four years, found that women consistently outperformed men in further education even though they had started their courses with almost the same A-level results.
An analysis of the department% results showed that while 65 per cent of female graduates were awarded, only 35 per cent of males did that well.
Girls are known to outperform boys at school, but this research shows the trend continues at university.
Fiona Smith, the senior lecturer at Brunel who led the study, said: “The survey proved a previously held opinion that the educational sex gap is purely a middle wrong school phenomenon. ”
It also makes the unfairness for working women in terms of pay. Women work. harder at school, harder at university and do better in both, yet still receive less pay.
The survey found that female students were harder working, less likely to miss lectures and more likely to believe their marks reflected their ability than their male competitors. Female students were also more likely to seek and receive support from teachers.
On the contrary, men were more likely than women to miss lectures due to
“laziness” and to believe that playing sport was an important part of university life.
Different from the popular argument that women's success is due to the increased emphasis on coursework, female geographers at Brunel did better in exams than in coursework, the research found.
The study, based on 180 questionnaires and interviews with more than 70 students, concluded that males underachieved because they felt working hard was not “macho”.
Dr Smith said: “Most women feel that getting good grades is the most important part of university life. They believe they need to work harder in order to be able to compete in the male-controlled environment they will face at work: good grades are viewed as an “insurance policy” for success. Men, on the other hand, feel that it's not “macho” to work hard. They tend to put going out and playing sport higher than
coursework.
60. The underlined word “It” in the sixth paragraph probably refers to .
A. the previously held opinion
C. the survey
B. a middle school phenomenon
D. the educational sex gap
61. The cause of women performing better at university than men is that .
A. female students did better at school before entering university
B. women will not find jobs unless working harder at university
C. women get more help and support from the teachers
D. most female students thinks good grades at university will benefit them in the future.
62. The underlined word “macho” might have the same meaning as .
A. pround B. manly C. brave D. strong
63. Which of the following might be the best title of this passage?
A. Women Outperform Men at University.
B. Women Should Receive the Same Pay as Men.
C. Males at University Perform too Badly.
D. Females Do Better at School as Well as at University.
C
When the world was a simpler place, the rich were fat, the poor were thin, and right-thinking people worried about how to feed the hungry. Now, in much of the world, the rich are thin, the poor are fat, and right-thinking people are worrying about fatness.
Evolution (进化) is mostly to blame. It has designed mankind to deal with lack, not plenty. People are perfectly fit to store energy in good years to see them through lean ones. But when bad times never come, they are stuck with that energy, stored around their expanding bellies (腹部).
Thanks to rising agricultural productivity, lean years are rarer all over the globe. According to the UN, the number of people short of food fell from 920m in 1980 to 799m 20 years later, even though the world's population increased by 1.6 billion over the period. This is mostly a cause for celebration. Mankind has won what was, for most of his time on this planet, his biggest battle, to ensure that he and his offspring had enough to eat. But every silver lining has a cloud, and the result of prosperity (繁荣) is a new trouble.
Fatness is the world's biggest public-health topic today-the main cause of heart disease, which kills more people these days than AIDS, malaria, war; the major risk factor in diabetes (糖尿病) ; heavily connected with cancer and other diseases. Since the World Health Organization labeled fatness an “epidemic (流行病)” in 2000, reports on its fearful results have come thick and fast.
Will public-health warnings, combined with media pressure, persuade people to get thinner, just as they finally put them off tobacco? Possibly. In the rich world, sales of healthier foods are booming and new figures suggest that over the past year Americans got very slightly thinner for the first time in recorded history. But even if Americans are losing a few ounces, it will be many years before the country solves the health problems caused by half a century’s dining to overload. And, everywhere else in the world, people are still piling on the pounds. That's why there is now an agreement among doctors that governments should do something to stop them.
64. What′s the main idea the writer intends to tell us in this passage?
A. It’s harmful to have enough to eat.
B. It’s better to be thin than fat.
C. Fatness is the greatest danger in the world.
D. Fatness has become a great health problem.
65. It can be inferred from the passage that the biggest problem in history is .
A. people were thin
B. people smoked heavily
C. there was not enough food to eat
D. people stored energy in good years
66. Why does the author compare smoking with the fatness problem in this passage?
A. They are both problems difficult to settle.
B. They both lead to the same diseases.
C. They are both bad habits.
D. They are both harmful to health.
67. Which of the following is true according to this passage?
A. Man has got rid of lean years by raising agricultural productivity.
B. Though difficult, man may break away from the fatness problem.
C. Fatness may cause many diseases such as heart disease, AIDS and cancer.
D. The doctors feel that they can do nothing about the fatness problem.
D
If it’s possible to see red about not seeing red, that is what I was doing. We had misjudged the timing of our autumn trip to see the changing leaves in the Great Lakes states, and I was really upset. No matter how I strained my eyes (使劲用眼), I couldn’t spot red anywhere. Not even a bit of golden yellow broke through the dull greenery.
This vacation was a complete waste. I sat alone in the backseat of our rented car and got angry as we drove north through the dull, dark green. In the front seat my husband and father chatted merrily, obviously unconcerned.
Then a motto came to mind :“Happiness is a decision. ”It must have been something my mother said. She was always passing on words of advice. When I was a child she gave me a little black book with empty pages. On the flyleaf (扉页) she had written, “Look for a beautiful thing and you will find it. ”I was supposed to keep a record of the most beautiful thing I saw day.
I remember spending hours debating what I'd write down. A baby's dimpled smile? A stone shining with fool's gold? Pictures in the clouds, or tulips (郁金香) tipping their heads? I found so many things it was impossible to pick just one.
Now, on the road, I played Mother's game again. I took in the all-green scenery. Thick forests lined both sides of the highway. The long conical (圆锥形的) pines and spruce (云杉) was seen here and there. Maple leaves danced in the gentle wind. I felt like a girl again -surrounded by beautiful things.
Later in the trip, after we crossed the Upper Peninsula and drove into Canada, I found the bright fall plants I had been looking for. But by then I'd already seen a million shades of green, the infinite variety and beauty that only our heavenly Father can produce. And that we can always find - if we look closely enough.
68. What was the purpose of the author's trip?
A. To see the green forest.
B. To have a sightseeing across America.
C. To see red leaves in fall.
D. To try out the motto her mother gave her.
69. What's the point the author wants to show in the passage?
A. Nothing is too difficult if you put your heart into it.
B. No pains, no gains.
C. Failure is the mother of success.
D. Beauty exists if you have an eye for it.
70. Which of the following can best describe the author's feeling at the end of her trip?
A. Delighted B. Angry C. Disappointed D. Surprised
71. The underlined phrase ”see red“ in the first paragraph probably means .
A. get discouraged B. get angry
C. get ashamed D. get excited
E
The English language is changing, and fast, thanks to the rapid progress of technology. We all have a choice: We can either bury our heads in the sand and spend the rest of our lives wishing Shakespeare were alive and well. Or we can embrace (拥抱) the new English, enter into the spirit of the Internet age and call it Weblish.
”You can't avoid it, for the simple reason that whenever a new variety of language comes along, it inevitably impacts (冲击) on the language as a whole,“ says Dr. David Crystal, honorary professor of linguistics (语言学家) at the University of Wales in Bangor, whose book ”Language and the Internet“ has just been published.
The trouble with keeping up with the new English is not so much that there are so many new words but that the old words no longer mean what we thought they did. In the past, if someone said they did not have Windows, you would have to suppose they lived in a cave. These days, it is probably because they use a Mac (which is a computer, not a raincoat). Spare is as disliked as it ever was, but whereas it once meant an unappetizing (引不起食欲) canned meat, it now stands for unwanted “junk” e-mail. Spellings are changing, too. Not only is text-messaging playing ”hvc wth vrbs “ (havoc (混乱) with verbs), but the conventions of e-mail communication place little emphasis on “perfick speling. ”
Wcblish loves to see nouns happily become verbs ( “Please bookmark this site”), and verbs become nouns ( “Send me the download”). Verbs and prepositions are regularly thrown together to become new nouns or adjectives (dial-up, logon, print-out,pull-clown, upload), while others are created from simply pairing nouns: cyberspace, ethernet , Internet, hyperlink, metatag, netspeak.
72. The best title of this passage would be .
A. Keep up with the latest weblish
B. Keep up with the latest development in English
C. Newly-invented English words
D. Technology and English
73. We can infer from the first paragraph that .
A. some people wish Shakespeare were still alive
B. people may have different attitudes towards weblish
C. all the people welcome weblish
D. weblish causes fear among people
74. The third paragraph is mainly about
A. different meanings of English words
B. the rapid changes of English words
C. the difficulty in understanding words related to computer and the Internet
D. the common words used on the Internet
75. Dr. David Crystal would probably agree that
A. people should not accept weblish
B. weblish can cause misunderstandings among people
C. weblish will destroy the English language
D. people should know something about weblish
第Ⅱ卷 （非选择题 共35分）
第四部分： 写（共两节，满分35分）
此题要求改正所给短文中的错误。对标有题号的每一行作出判断：如无错误，在该行右边的横线上划一个勾（√）；如有错误（每行只有一个错误），则按下列情况改正：
该行多一个词：把多余的词用斜线（\）划掉,在该行右边横线上写出该词,并也用斜线划掉.
该行缺一个词:在缺词处加一个漏字符号(∧),在该行右边横线上写出该加的词.
该行错一个词:在错的词下划一横线,在该行右边横线上写出改正后的词.
注意:原行没有错的不要改.
Anita Mei was a very famous pop singer in Hong Kong. Together 76.
with her mother, she began to perform in the age of four. In the early 77.
1980s, she took part in a local singing competition but won the first 78.
prize. The song “Bad Girl” made her famous. The following years see 79.
Anita play in many movies and made many records. Some of her songs 80.
were very popular. She was always ready to help others, she made 81.
a lot of good friends. When SARS hit Hong Kong last year, they 82.
organized several pop concert with other pop stars, calling on Hong 83.
Kong people to bravely face the disease. Sad, Anita died of cancer 84.
in December, . The brave and the beautiful lady will always be 85.
remembered by people.
第二节:书面表达 (满分25分)
下面一幅图画描述的是一位名叫付旦的小学生每周要应付的课外学习情况.请根据图画内容,写一篇100词左右的短文,描述付旦目前的学习处境,并适当发表自己的观点.
参考答案
第Ⅰ卷 (共115分 )
听力(共20小题; 每小题1.5分,满分30分)
1-5 CCBBB 6-10 BBAAB 11-15 CCCAC 16--20 AACBA
单项填空(共15小题;每小题1分,满分15分)
21-25 BDCAC 26-30 CDBBA 31-35BADCC 16-20 AACBA
完形填空 (共20小题;每小题1.5分,满分30分)
36-40CADBA 41- 45 CDABB 46-50CADCA
阅读理解 (共20小题;每小题2分,满分40分)
56-60 BACDC 61-65 DBADC 66- 70 ABCDA 71-75 BABCD
第Ⅱ卷 (共35分)
短文改错(10分)
Anita Mei was a very famous pop singer in Hong Kong. Together 76. √
with her mother, she began to perform in the age of four. In the early 77. at
1980s, she took part in a local singing competition but won the first 78. and
prize. The song ~Bad Girl” made her famous. The following years see 79. saw
Anita play in many movies and made many records. Some of her songs 80. make
were very popular. She was always ready to help others, ∧she made 81. and/so
a lot of good friends. When SARS hit Hong Kong last year, they 82. she
organized several pop concert with other pop stars, calling on Hong 83.concerts
Kong people to braveiy face the disease. Sad, Anita died of cancer 84. Sadly
in December, 2003. The brave and the beautiful lady will always be 85. the
remembered by people.
书面表达 (25分)
Little Fu Dan is one of the children who have to bear heavy burden in China today. Every day after school, and even at weekends, he is rushed to so many extra courses, such as music, art, mathematics, English, computer etc. that he almost has no time left to enjoy himself or to do what he likes. Parents nowadays just have too much expectation from their children. In my opinion, parents should give more time for their children to play instead of doing endless homework or attending so many extra courses, which does no good to both their mind and health. (101 words)
附: 听力部分录音稿
第一节(共5小题; 每题1.5分,满分7.5分)
I. M: It’s so hot today. I simply can’t work. I wish there were a fan in this room.
W: So do I. I’ll fall asleep if I stay here any longer.
2. W: Excuse me, professor Hill. May I ask you a few questions?
M: Yes, of course. But I'm sorry I have a class at ten. Why don't you come during my office hours. That is 4 to 5 p.m. Monday, Thursday and Friday.
3. W: Do you think it is a good play?
M: What I don't understand is the very beginning.
4. M: Have you ever been to Canada?
W: I want to someday. So far I've been to Japan, Korea and China.
5. M: Excuse me, could you please tell me the way to the city library?
W: I'm sorry. I'm a stranger here myself, but if you cross the road and ask in the police station which is beside the supermarket, I'm sure they'll help you.
第二节 (共15小题;每题1.5分,满分22.5分)
听第6段材料,回答第6-8题.
6. W: Well, good morning, Tom. I haven't seen you for a long time. What seems to be the trouble now?
M: I feel very tired. I've got a bad headache And I can't sleep well almost every night.
W: Have you been eating properly? Eating the right kind of food is important for your health, you know.
M: Well, I haven't been eating too well, I guess. I have a lot of work to do, and I usually only have enough time to have a sandwich and a cup of coffee for lunch.
W: And what about dinner?
M: Sometimes I'm too tired to eat anything at all.
W: That's too bad. You must have a well -balanced diet. But I think the most important thing for you to do at the moment is to have a good rest.
M: Yes, I see.
听第7段材料,回答第9-11题.
7. W: Hello, fire service,
M: Oh, I'm ringing because I think there's a fire in the house opposite. Smoke is
coming out of the upstairs windows.
W: Can you give me your name and address and telephone number, please?
M.. Yes, Hank Cousins, 17 Mallett Street, Alford.
W. I'm sorry. Can you spell Mallett, please?
M. Yes. M-A double L-E double T. The telephone number is 6943168. The fire's in number 18 just across the road.
W. Is anyone in the house?
M. No, they've gone on holiday. They went to the Mediterranean last Saturday, for two weeks.
W: All right, we'll get there immediately.
M.. What shall I do? Shall I warn the neighbours?
W. Yes, you'd better tell the people living next door, at number 16 and number 20. But don't go into the house.
听第8段材料,回答第12-14题.
8. W: Hi, Bob. Haven’t seen you for ages. What's happened to you?
M: I have been in the hospital.
W: Oh, I'm sorry to hear that. But for what?
M: Er-, I had a car accident three weeks ago.
W: Really? So you were injured and treated in the hospital?
M: Yes. But luckily, only my left arm was broken. And I can move it now.
W: Good. But how did it happen?
M: I was driving to work on Broad Street and crashed into a pole.
W: You were driving too fast, I suppose.
M: Yes, and I regret it.
W: Remember the lesson. I hope you will return to work soon.
M: Thanks a lot.
听第9段材料,回答第15-17题..
9. M: Mrs. Speneer, what time is Mr. Black's flight expected to arrive at Boston Airport?
W: Around 2 pm, sir. Will you go with the company car to meet him?
M: Yes. So I'd better leave here no later than now. How about the hotel for Mr. Black and his party?
W: I made the reservations for them last week and checked again yesterday to be sure everything is ready.
M: Including the welcome room for tonight’s reception?
W: That's right. The manager promised me that everything would be exactly as we have requested.
M: Excellent. I want everything to be the very best.
W: I'm sure it will be. That manager has never let us down yet.
M: We want to make a good impression. Not just to be sure that this business deal is a success, but to pay back the wonderful treatment we received from them in Tokyo last year.
听第10段材料,回答第18-20题..
10. Paul, a salesman from London, was driving past a sports car parked outside a supermarket, when he saw it start to roll slowly down the hill. Inside the car were two young girls on the passenger seat - but no driver. Paul stopped quickly, jumped in front of the sports car and tried to stop it, pushing against the front of the car. Another man who was standing nearby got into the car and put on the handbrake, saving the girls from injury.
It was at this point that Paul noticed his own car roiling slowly down the hill and going too fast for him to Stop it. It crashed into a bus at the bottom of the hill and was so badly damaged that it had to be pulled away to a garage.
As if this was not bad enough, Paul now found he had no one to blame. He was so busy chasing his car that he didn't get the name of the driver of the sports car, who just came out of the supermarket and drove away without realizing what had happened.
篇3：高考英语第一轮总复习讲座之二（SBⅠ-Units 3-4）
一、单元考点提示
1.单词
A. a little / little, between/among , still/yet/already, while.
B.except/except for/but, fly, love, not a/not any, through/ across, travel/journey/trip.
2.短语
A．in English, written English, more or less, come about, the same…as / the same…that, for example /such as.
B. see sb. off , by bus, say“Hi”to, see sb. doing sth, be about to +inf., take off , for miles and miles, nothing except/nothing but
3.句型结构
1.“主语+ have +(修饰语：no, little, some, much, great 等)+difficulty/ trouble+in+doing sth.”
2. I’d like to do something.
3. How about……?(=What about…？)
4. It is/was + adj .+ inf.
5.感叹语。What(a)+名词+主语+谓语！
How + 形容词/副词+主语+谓语！
6. take与时间短语连用时有三种句型结构
4.日常交际用语
1.请对方重复所说内容：
Would you please say that again?
Pardon?
Sorry, I didn’t quite follow you.
Sorry, I didn’t catch what you said.
2.问对方什么意思：
What do you mean?
What do you mean by that?
What dose this word mean?
What’s the meaning of this word?
3.对对方的祝愿：
Good luck(to you).
Wish you good luck/success.
May you succeed.
Have a nice /good time.
Have a good trip to Guang zhou.
-Have a nice weekend.
-The same to you.
对比：
-Happy birthday to you.
-Thank you.
二、考点精析与拓展
I.单词和词组
1. pronounce t. i. 发……音；发音。名词形式为pronunciation.
①How do you puonounce the word?这个单词你怎么发音？
②This letter in the word doesn’t pronounce. 这个单词中的这个字母不发音。
2. however adv. 然而；但是。表示转折，起承上启下的作用。本身具有相对的独立性，通常逗号与句子其他部分隔开。
①He likes singing. He can’t sing very well, however. 他喜欢唱歌，然而唱不好。
②He didn’t agree with me ; however, he said nothing.他不同意我的看法，但他什么也没说。
3. follow t.
(1)跟随；跟着。
We followed the professor into the lab . 我们跟着教授走进了实验室。
(2)听懂；理解。
Would you please say it again? I can’t follow you. 请再说一遍好吗?我没听懂。
4. know about/of : have information concerning 听说（关于……的事情）；知道；了解。
Know vt. : have in mind as the result of experience or because one has learned 认识，知道。
①I don’t know the writer , but I know about him.我不认识那位作家，但我听说过他。
②I know him ,but I don’t know about him. 我认识他，但我并不了解他。
5.more or less 或多或少；大体上；大约。
①-How far is your family away from here?你家离这里多远？
-Ten kilometres ,more or less.大约10公里。
②The work is more or less finished. 这项工作大体上完成了。
6.come about: happen 产生；发生。相当于不及物动词，和happen, take place一样无被动语态。
①How did this accident come about ?这事故怎么发生的？
②I don’t know how the quarrel came about.我不知道怎么发生的争吵。
7. stay link-v. 保持；维持。后面通常接形容词作表语。
①The weather stays fine for three days. 天气好了3天了。
②The shop stayed open till six o’clock. 这家商店营业到6点。
8. a great/good many: a large number of许多。修饰可数名词复数。
I’m quite busy. I have a great many things to do. 我很忙，我有很多事要做。
若复数名词前有限定词或其修饰的为代词时，应加of .
①A great many of the books have been sold out. 已经卖了很多书了。
②A great many of them are out of work.他们很多人失业了。
9. and so on : etc 等等。用来表示列举，但又不一一列出。
He knows five foreign languages, English, French, Japanese and so on.他懂5种外语，如英语、法语、日语等等。
10. explain t. 说明；解释；讲解。
①He explained why he was late.他说明了迟到的原因。
②Please explain this exercise to me . 请把这个练习给我讲一讲。
11. separate
(1)adj. 分离的；分开的。
My little son wants a separate room. 我小儿子想要个单词。
(2) t. ; vi. 使分开；分离；隔开。常与from 搭配。
①Separate the bad apples from the good ones.把坏苹果和好的分开。
②England is separated from France by the Channel.英吉利海峡把英国和法国分隔开。
③We talked until midnight and then separated.我们一直谈到半夜，然后才分手。
12. in prep. 在……之后。用于“将来一段时间之后”。
① Your birthday is in two weeks’ time .你的生日还有两周。
② I’ll finish the work in 3 days/in 3 days’ time. 这两项工作我3天后完成。
注意：“将来具体时间之后”用after。
① I’ll be back in 3 days.3天后我回来.
② I’ll be back after the New year. 新年后我回来。
13. when conj. (就在)这时、那时。用作并列连词，不能置于句首。
① I was listening to music when I heard someone knocking at the door. 我正在听音乐，这时听到有人敲门。
② I’ll call on you tomorrow, when I’ll explain it to you. 明于我去看你，那时我再向你说明那件事情。
14. by prep. 乘……。用来表示方式，其后的名词为单数，且不加冠词。
例如 by bike/bus/ car /taxi/train//road/railway/land/boat/ship/ water/ sea/
plane/air
但：“步行”用on foot.
注意：若表示交通工具的名词前有限定词，则将by 改作in 或on.
in one’s/the car/ bus/plane etc.
on the bike
15. but prep. 除…之外。与except同义，除了的部分与其他部分不在一个范围内，不具有一致性。except适用场合较多，but 主要用于带有nothing/nobody/no one/all 等不定代词的句子。
①No one except/but you was late.除你之外没有迟到。（你迟到了）
②We all went to see a film yesterday evening except/but you.除你之外作天晚上我们都去看电影了。（你没去）
③That window is open except in winter .除冬天外那窗户一直开着。（冬天不开）另外，but后可接不不定式。如果句子前面有实义动词do及其变化形式时，不定式不带to; 否则不定式带to .
①I did nothing yesterday evening but watch TV。昨天晚上除看电视外我什么也没干。
②He had no choice but to leave.他只得离开。
注意：besides 也是介词，意为“除……之外（还有）”。除了的部分和其他部分在同一个范围内，具有一致性。
①We all went to see a film yesterday evening besides you.除你之外昨天晚上我们也都去看电影了。（你和我们都去了）
②Who is going there with Tom besides you? 除你之外还有谁和汤姆一起去？
16.price n. 价格。常用结构：
（1）at a high/low price以高价/低价
He is very happy because he bought a new car at a low price.因为低价买了一部新车，所有他很高兴。
（2）英语中买卖的物品以“贵、贱”论，即expensive/dear或cheap;物品的价格以“高、低”论,即high或low.
-Your new car only cost you 20,000 dollars. It’s really cheap.你的新车只花了2万美元，真便宜。
-Yes, the price is very low indeed.是啊价格确实很低。
（3）提问price 时应用what(多少) 。
17. destroy t.毁坏；破坏；毁灭。
①Don’t destroy the box .It may be useful.不要弄坏这个盒子，可能还有用。
②The whole building was badly desdtroyed by the fire.整幢楼房都被大火严重烧毁了。
18.see…off 为…送行。
① Is anybody seeing you off ?有人送你吗？
②Tomorrdow I must go to the airport to see my brother off .明天我得到机场为我哥哥送行。
19.其他：
（1）the (United)States美国。
（2）for the first time第一次。
（3）take /have an exam 参加考试。
（4）between…and…在…与…之间。
（5）written/spoken English英语书面语/口语。
（6）answer/key to………的答案/钥匙。
（7）in the same way 以同样的方式；用同样的方法。
（8）bring in 带进来；引入；吸收.
（9）one’s own/native language某人的母语/本族语。
（10）ask(sb.)for sth .(向某人)要……。
（11）change…into…把……变成……。
（12）go on holidays去度假
（13）take a taxi/bus /train/plane/lift乘出租车/汽车/火车/飞机/电梯。
（14）have a nice/good /wonderful/pleasant time过得输快；玩得开心。
（15）have a nice/good/pleasant trip/journey旅途愉快；一路顺风。
（16）in the middle of 在……的中央/中心。
（17）by the river 在河边。
（18）all night /day long整夜/整天；all the year round 整年；一年到头。
（19）shout at 朝/向……大喊。
（20）take off 起飞；land着/登陆。
（21）move on 继续移动/迁移。
（22）be made from/of 由……制成的。
（23）get/be back 回来。
（24）a friend of mine (名词性物主代词)我的一位朋友。
a friend of my father’s (名词所有格)我父亲的一位朋友。
II.句型
1. have/find + difficulty/trouble + (in)doing sth ./ with sth.
There be + difficulty/trouble + (in) doing sth./with sth.
做某事有困难/麻烦；在……方面有困难/麻烦。
其中的difficulty和trouble为不可数名词；doing前的介词in 可省略。
①I have some difficulty(in)pronouncing some English words.有些英语单词我发音有困难。
②Everyone in the town knew him; so we had no difficulty(in) finding his house。镇上所有的人都认识他，所有我们毫不费力就找到了他的家。
③The boy had little difficulty with maths.这孩子学数学没困难。
④There was much difficulty (in) finding him.好不容易才找到他。
2. would like 想要；愿意；希望。用来表示愿望，常用结构：
（1）would like sth.
Would you like some beer?想喝点啤酒吗？
（2）would like to do sth.愿意、想要做某事。
第一人称作主语时也可用should，用常用缩写形式。
①He’d like to go there but he is too busy.他想到那里去，但太忙了 。
②I would/should like to study medicine and become a doctor.我想学医当医生。
注意：回答时常用省略形式。
-Would you like to drink some beer? 想喝点啤酒吗？
-Yes ,I’d like to .好吧，喝点。
(3)would like sb.to do sth.想要、希望别人做某事。并不是主语做。
①I would like her to stay in the company.我希望她留在公司里。
②I’d like you to lend some money to him.我想要你借点钱给他。
3.the same (…)as…和/同……一样。same之前总是带定冠词
①Jenny looks the same as before.詹妮看起来和以前一样。
②He is the same age as his wife.他和他妻子同龄。
③I have the same opinion as you(have).我和你意见一致。
4.I’m sorry(that)…很抱歉……。是自认为表现欠妥或做事失误时的道歉用语，其后的从句说明道歉的内容和原因。
①I’m sorry I can’t answer the question.对不起我不会回答这个问题。
②I’m sorry that I broke your glass.很抱歉我把你的杯子打破了。
5. Do give her my regards.请一定代我她问好。
助动词 do 及其变化形式可在肯定句中用来强调动词，意为“务必；一定；的确；真的”,加强了句子的语气。
①Do be careful! 一定要小心
② I do like you.我真的喜欢你。
③She does work very hard.她学习确实很努力。
④-Why didn’t you tell him?你为什么不告诉他？
-I did tell him.我告诉他了。
6.The same to you : I wish you the same .希望您也如此。
当听到对方的良好祝愿时，常用此句来作答。
①- Have a good time.祝你愉快。
-The same to you.祝你愉快。
②-Merry Christmas and Happy New year. 祝你圣诞快乐、新年幸福。
-The same to you .祝你也快乐、幸福。
但：-Happy birthday to you.祝你生日快乐。
-Thank you.谢谢。
如果双方同一天生日，就用The same to you.
7.say “Hi/Hello”to somebody 向某人问候。
类似的还有：say“Yes/OK/No”to sb./sth.同意/不同意……
say“Good-bye”to sb.向某人告别。
Say“Sorry”to sb .向某人道歉。
After saying “Good-bye”to us, he left hurriedly.和我们道别之后，他匆匆离开了。
8.be about to do sth. 正要、即将做某事。是将来时的一种表达方式，表示最近的将来。
①I was about to go to bed when he called.我正要去睡觉，这时他打来了电话。
②When I saw Tom, he was about to get on the bus.我看到汤姆，他正要上汽车。
注意：be about to 通常不用于带有具体时间状语的句子，但可用be going to 表示。
①Hurry up! They are about to start.快点！他们就要走了。
②Hurry up! They are going to start at 10 o’clock.快点！
10点钟他们就要走了。
9.see sb. doing sth . 看到某人正在做某事（看到动作的一部分。）
see sb. do sth . 看到某人做过某事（看到了动作的全过程。）
①I saw him crossing the treet.我看到他正在过马路。
②I saw him cross the street.我看到他过了马路。
当用到不定式作宾语补足语时，不定式不带to .但在被动句中不定式须带to 。
He was seen to fall suddenly from the tree.人们看到他突然从树上掉了下来。
10.Isn’t it easier to stay in the same place ？留在原地难道不更舒服一些吗？
否定疑问句用来表示对某事感到惊讶，含批评意味。相当于汉语的“难道不/莫非……？”
① Don’t you know my address?难道你不知道我的地址吗？
②Can’t you speak English?你难道不会说英语吗？
③Isn’t it happy to live with us ?莫非和我们生活在一起不快乐？
11.It takes sb. some time to do sth .做某事花某人时间。其中的It 是形式主语。代替后面的不定式（短语）。
①It will take us a whole week to travel through the forest. 穿过这片森林得用我们一整周时间。
②It took them 3 days to finish the work.干完这项工作用了他们3天时间。
经典名题导解
1. We all write _____, even when there’s not much to say.(94年高考题)
A.now and then B.by and by
C.step by step D.more or less
答案：A
命题目的：考查运用短语的能力。
解题思路：根据选项，B项意为“不久”，C项是“逐渐地”，D项是“或多或少”的意思，根据句子意思B、C、D不合题意，而A项now and then意为“不时”“有时”，相当于sometimes,from time to time,根据关键信息even when there’s not much to say 的提示，故选 A。
误点突破：B、C、D不符合题意，故不能选。
2.If we work with a strong will, we can overcome any diffic-ulty,_____ great it is .(95年高考题)
A. what B.how C.however D.Whatever
答案:C
命题目的：考查复合句。
解题思路: 全句意思是：“无论困难多大，只要我们有坚强的意志都能克服”，根据题意，是考查让步状语从句，排除A、B项，C、D 选择，D项whatever不修饰形容词，只有however修饰形容词，“无论多么……”的意思，故选 C。
误点突破:A、B项只引导名词性从句，不引导状语从句，故不能选。
3._______mother will wait for him to have dinner together(高考题)
A.However late is he B.However late he is
C.However is he late D.However he is late
答案:B
命题目的:考查让步状语从句的语序。
解题思路：根据句子的结构与选项，本题考查however 引导的让步状语从句的语序，其语序应是“however+形容词（副词）+主语+谓语+其他，”故选 B。
4.I don’t really work here;I ______until the new secretary arrives(94年高考题)
A.just helped out B.have just helped out
C.am just helping out D.will just helped out
答案：C
命题目的:考查现在进行时的用法。
解题思路：根据题意，I don’t really work here 是关键信息，从而推出“我是在这里帮忙，一直到新秘书来。现在进行时是表示在现阶段或讲话的时刻正在进行的动作。”
误点突破A、B、D时态不对，不符合题意。
5.The whole family_______to Guangzhou for holidays tomorrow.
A.is going B. are going C.goes D.went
答案:B
命题目的：考查现在进行时表将来的用法。
解题思路：根据题中tomorrow这个关键信息，本题应用将来时态，the whole family表示整个家里的人，强调个体，其谓语动词用复数，故选B。
进行时表将来在英语中多用于移位动词：go ,come, arrive, leave,start 等词。
误点突破：A项人称数不对，C、D项时态不对。
三、课后巩固训练
Ⅰ、单项填空
A）从A、B、C、D四个选项中找出其划线部分与所给词的划线部分读音相同的选项。
1.botany A.astonish B.nobody C.done D.stone
2.major A.mayer B.manager C.garage D.grey
3.captain A.certain B.curtain C.mountain D.said
4.owner A.allow B.crowded C.coat D.flower
5.seize A.practise B.increase C.raise D.horse
B）从A、B、C、D四个选项中，找出能填入空白处的最佳答案。
6. The Arab insisted that he_______never_______the camel.
A.should,see B.has,seen C.had,seen D.was,seen
7. He was all_______when he began his new job.
A.at sea B.at the sea C.by sea D.on the sea
8. You’ll suffer one day_______your insolence(无礼)?
A.for B.from C.of D.about
9. I suggest_______it in a different way.
A.to do B.doing C.do D.done
10. When the dog attacked me,I_______myself with a stick.
A.defended B.defeated C.guarded D.protected
11. The castle was taken_______surprise.
A.in B.by C.to D.with
12. The Americans_______the British in 1781.
A.defeated B.beated C.won D.gained
13. After the war Cook married and_______home in London.
A.set up B.put up C.built D.founded
14. -Who told you about Dad’s illness?
-The doctor in_______.
A.connection B.turn C.public D.charge
15. -I have just had my watch repaired.
-How much did they_______for that?
A.cost B.charge C.spent D.take
16. As well as_______his leg,he hurt his arm.
A.breaking B.break C.broke D.to break
17. Tom as well as his friends_______fond of music.
A.is B.are C.were D.have been
18. He came here_______purpose to borrow money from you.
A.for B.with C.to D.on
19. Madame Curie worked hard_______the unknown matter.
A.to hind B.for search of C.in search of D.in search
20. It is good manners to make_______for the old.
A.place B.seat C.room D.position
21. Early in the morning I often find the glass_______with little drops of water.
A.cover B.covering C.to cover D.covered
22. He heard of an elephant,but never saw_______.
A.that B.it C.one D.the one
23. The train is heading_______Beijing.
A.for B.to C.at D.from
24. Thus we had to_______getting rid of the smoke.
A.set out B.set off C.set up D.set about
25. Is this research centre_______you visited the modern equipment last year?
A.where B.that C.the one that D.the one where
Ⅱ、完形填空（共20小题，满分30分）
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从26-50各题所给四个选项中选出一个最佳答案。
A certain student passed all his examinations.Then he went to college to continue his 26 .There he put down his 27 for a course in geography,but after the first 28 ,he did not go to it any more.
The geography lecturer 29 that this student was always 30 and thought that he had changed to another course,so he was 31 when he saw the boy’s name on the 32 of students who wanted to take the geography 33 at the end of this year.
The lecturer had prepared a 34 examination paper,which followed his 35 very closely,and he was 36 to see how this student would answer the question.He 37 that the boy’s answers would be very bad,but when they 38 him soon after the exam and he examined them 39 ,he was able to find only ne small mistake in them. 40 this surprised him very much,he 41 the paper again and again but was 42 not able to find more than that one small mistake so he 43 for the student to question him about his work.
When the student came into the room and sat down,the lecturer said to him.“I 44 that you came to my first lecture and you have been absent from all the 45 .But now I have examined your 46 very carefully and I have been able to find only one small mistake in it.I am 47 to know your explanation for that.”
“Oh,I am very 48 about that mistake,”answered the student.“After the examination,I 49 what I ought to have 50 .I would not have made that mistake if I had not been confused(搞乱)by your first lecture.”
26.A.classes B.studies C.researches D.work
27.A.request B.lecture C.time D.sight
28.A.week B.lecture C.visit D.game
29.A.heard B.noticed C.wondered D.believed
30.A.absent B.late C.lazy D.careless
31.A.surprised B.angry C.pleased D.regretful
32.A.exam-papers B.list C.desk D.letters
33.A.subject B.test C.notes D.course
34.A.simple B.difficult C.secret D.strange
35.A.compositions B.reports C.lectures D.texts
36.A.sure B.worried C.glad D.eager
37.A.hoped B.discovered C.expected D.checked
38.A.showed B.gave C.handed D.reached
39.A.hurriedly B.carefully C.anxiously D.quickly
40.A.So B.But C.Though D.As
41.A.enjoy B.examined C.marked D.kept
42.A.still B.certainly C.even D.luckily
43.A.cared B.searched C.sent D.looked
44.A.promise B.know C.advise D.guess
45.A.others B.turn C.courses D.ones
46.A.lesson B.paper C.notebook D.exercises
47.A.disappointed B.easy C.satisfied D.curious
48.A.sorry B.sad C.nervous D.worried
49.A.realized B.understood C.remembered D.insisted
50.A.done B.made C.written D.got
Ⅲ、阅读理解（共20小题，满分40分）
A）阅读下列短文，从每题所给的四个选项中选择最佳答案。
A
Many people come to big cities without any aims.They often think that they will find work and excitement there.Some of them expect success in arts and in the theatre,but others just want to be in a place where there are always lot of activities.Many of them end up working as office workers or factory workers.Some end up without any job at all.
Lenny Leggs had been in Los Anegles for three years.He was brought up in a small town.He dropped out of school when he was fifteen.The next year he got on a bus to Los Angeles.He had only fifteen dollars in his pocket when he arrived in the city.He had good luck in the beginning.After a few weeks he got a job at a gas station.He kept the job nearly two years.Then the boss sold the station and Lenny was fired.He has been looking for a job for quite some time but can’t find any.Lenny sometimes thinks about going back home.But he stays on because he tells himself his luck will change tomorrow or the day after.
51. A lot of people coming to large cities_______.
A.cannot tell what they’ll do
B.can find a place with activity
C.are sure to find jobs
D.are to succeed in arts and in the theatre
52. What is the result to“some of the people”who come to big cities?
A.Most of the people become factory of office workers
B.They have succeeded in the theatre and in arts.
C.They can not find any kind of work in the end.
D.Some of them have to leave the big city and go back home.
53. Lenny Leggs left his native place to Los Angeles_______.
A.when he was seventeen years old
B.before he had finished school
C.when he had been brought up in his hometown
D.after he dropped out of school at the age of sixteen
54. At about 19,Lenny Leggs_______.
A.had a little money with him when he reached the city
B.found a job shortly after he got to Los Angeles
C.was hired by the boss to work at the gas station
D.was out of work in Los Angeles
55. Lenny Leggs stays on in the city after he lost his job because_______.
A.he is certain that the boss will find him a job
B.he got some dollars and needn’t look for a job in a hurry
C.he always hopes he’ll soon have good chances
D.he’s sure about finding work at any time
B
By now you have learned to plan and write a paragraph carefully so that it says what you think clearly and completely.But the job of writing a good paragraph does not end there.One more important step must be taken.Checking for careless mistakes.You must examine what you have written to make sure it is the best you can do and to get rid of mistakes you can find two things are important to remember;checking to make sure that your ideas are clearly presented,and checking closely for certain mistakes you may have missed.
First,read your paragraph aloud in order to hear how it sounds.This will help you find your mistakes in your paragraph.If you are embarrassed at the thought of reading your own paper aloud,find a quiet place,and read quietly to yourself,If you have no worry about reading aloud,it is often helpful to read to someone else-someone who can tell you if your paragraph should “make sense”and if you have any mistakes.
Second,read(aloud or silently)the paper through again several times-looking for a different type of mistake with each reading.You must read it a number times in order to catch all the mistakes you probably make.
56. When you are to write a paragraph,first_______.
A.you should check what has been written
B.you try to find the mistakes in your article
C.you should form a plan of what you are going to write about
D.you should read your paragraph aloud
57. “…checking closely for certain mistakes you may have missed”means“_______.”
A.examining carefully the mistakes which have not been in your article
B.looking at your mistakes on the paper very closely
C.going over your article and picking up the mistakes which you did not notice
D.missing the mistakes which you lost in your article
58. Read your article aloud before the public_______.
A.if you are mistaken
B.if you are brave enough
C.if you feel shy
D.no matter whether you are brave or not
59. “Make sense”means“_______”.
A.can be understandable B.build up the sense of hearing
C.check up your mistakes D.do without any mistake
60. The purpose of reading your paragraph several times is_______.
A.to find the grammatical mistakes
B.to form the logical idea as well as picking the mistakes in the article
C.only to see whether it sounds better
D.to make sure if your idea is clear enough
C
In 1801,Thomas Jefferson became President of the United States,which then included sixteen states that lay east of the Mississippi River,France controlled the large area in the centre of the continent,which was known as the Louisiana territory,and the land west of the Rocky Mountains was primarily under Spanish Control of the North west was disputed(争论)by England,Russia,Spain,and the United States.Jefferson,a leader with foresight,believed that it would do good to the United States to own the rich land.In addition,the port cities at the mouth the Mississippi River were controlled by France.Jefferson regarded this as possible danger to the U.S.economy and to national safety,so he went to Napoleon with an offer to buy the land.
Napoleon agreed to sell the land for $ 15 million,which ended up just a few cents an acre.He decided to give up his holdings in America,which he had just won from Spain,so that he could raise money to conquer(占领)all of Europe.
61. Thomas Jefferson bought the land for_______reasons.
A.1 B.w C.3 D.4
62. From the passage we know that the Louisiana Territory_______.
A.was under Spanish control
B.was the land east of the Mississippi River
C.lay west of the Rocky Mountains
D.formed the western part of the Mississippi valley
63. What is untrue according to the passage_______.
A.The land was rich
C.The land was first controlled by Spain
C.Thomas Jefferson was the president of the 18th century
D.Napoleon sold the land very cheaply
64. -Why did Napoleon agree to sell the land?
-Because_______.
A.the land was very poor B.it was an act of friendship
C.he wanted to get America’s support D.he had the ambition(野心)for Europe
65. What is the title for the passage?
A.Thomas Jefferson’s ForesightB.The Form of the U.S.A
C.The Louisiana Purchase(购买)D.The Louisiana Territory
D
There is reason to believe that when teachers feel that certain child will do well in school,that child will in fact to do well.The self-fulfilling prophecy-a phenomenon(现象)by which people act as they are expected to-has been recorded in many different situations.
In the Oak School experiment,some teachers in the California elementary school were told at the beginning of the term that some of their pupils has shown unusual potential(潜力)for intellectual(智力的)growth.Actually,the children,who were called potential bloomers had been chosen aimlessly.There was certainly no basis for thinking that their IQs(智商)would rise any more than those of any other children.But on the tests several months or more later,many of the selected children-especially the first and second graders-showed unusual gains IQ scores.Besides,the teachers seemed to like the “bloomers”better.
66. According to the passage,these children experienced_______.
A.no change in their IQ scores B.actual increase in IQ scores
C.several experiments D.different situations
67. The gains of the“bloomers”were greatest if intellectual growth were chosen on_______.
A.third or fourth grade
B.six or seven grade
C.eighth or ninth grade
D.first or second grade
68. The children named as having potential for intellectual growth were chosen on_______.
A.the basis of their IQ scores
B.no basis
C.the basis of the teacher’s reports
D.the basis of their work in school
69. What does the author think of the phenomenon“the self-fulfilling prophecy”?_______.
A.He believes that it is true
B.He thinks that there is no basis
C.We don’t know
D.He doesn’t know
70. What do you think is the cause of the children’s increases in IQ scores? The increases of the children’s IQ scores is that_______.
A.the teachers liked the children
B.the children had shown unusual potential for intellectual growth
C.the pupils acted as they were expected to by their teachers
D.the pupils were in Grade One or Grade Two
B）根据对话内容，从对话后的选项中选出填入空白处的最佳答案。
John:My Boss told me you would never go to work again.
Mary: 71 .
John:I don’t know he let me never go to work again.
Mary:Did you usually go to work late?
John: 72 .
Mary:When you did your work, 73 .
John:Sometimes.
Mary:How did you look at the clock on the wall.
John: 74 .
Mary:Could you use a computer?
John:No,I can only use a typewriter.
Mary:Well,I think I know why. You did not use your time well.You did not plan things
well. 75 .
John:I see.I think I must work harder and learn to use a computer soon.
A.did you think about other things?
B.you did not learn new things.
C.Don’t tell a lie.
D.Every ten minutes.
E.Well,I often did.
F.It was a short time.
G.I can’t believe it.
Ⅳ、单词拼写（共10小题）
76.It was a_______to see te animals that are found nowhere else in the world.
77.To d_______our motherland is our duties.
78.We always c_______National Day that first of October of every year.
79.S_______or swim,I will try.
80.Man is a t_______animal.
81.I saw six_______(商人)get on the ship.
82.Who has eaten the_______(饼干)on the table?
83.The thief forced a_______(通道)through the crowd and ran away.
84.The big boy took the_______(较大的)part of the apple.
85.They are“old hands”_______(熟练的)at their jobs.
Ⅴ、短文改错（共10小题）
此题要求改正所给短文中的错误。对标有题号的每一行作出判断：如无错误，在该行右边横线上面画一个勾（√）；如有错误（每行只有一个错误），则按下列情况改正；
此行多一个词：把多余的词用斜线（/）划掉，在该行右边横线上写出该词，并也用斜线划掉。
此行缺一个词：在缺词处加一个漏字符号（^），在该行右边横线上写出该加的词。
此行错一个词：在错的词上划一横线，在该行右边横线上写出改正后的词。
注意：原行没有错的不要改。
Tom loved the movies.He spent most of his time see 86._______
films,and often took afternoons off from work to go to 87._______
the movies.If there was a particularly good film on,
nothing could stop him go to see it. 88._______
One day he was sitting in the movie theatre watched 89._______
his favorite movie stars in the screen when a young 90._______
woman steped into the theatre and came up to him.She was
dressed in a wedding gown and carrying some flowers. 91._______
“Tom”,she cried angry.“What are you doing here? Don’t 92._______
you know what day is?” 93._______
“Yes,of course I do.”he replies,“but I told you I’d 94._______
come only if there wasn’t good film on.” 95._______
Ⅵ、书面表达（满分30分）
下列面图画描述李雷关心他的残疾(disabled)同学王平的情景。请据此为一家中学生英文报的好人好事专栏写一篇100字左右的短文。
参考答案
Ⅰ.Ⅱ.Ⅲ
1-10 ABCCC CAABA 11-20 BAADB AADCC
21-30 DCADD ADBBA 31-40 ABBBC DCDBD
41-50 BACBA BDAAC 51-60 ACBDC CCBAB
61-70 BDCDC BDBAC 71-75 GEADB
76.astonishing 77.defend 78.celebrate 79.Sink 80.thinking 81.merchants 82.biscuit 83.passage 84.major 85.skilled 86.see-seeing 87.√ 88.go-going 89.watched-watching 90.in-on 91.steped-stepped 92.angry-angrily 93.is-it is 94.replies-replied 95.good-a good
Ⅵ.One possible version:
Always Ready to Help Others
On Children’s Day,Li Lei saw some children buying balloons.Thinking of his disabled classmate Wang Ping,for whom it wasn’t easy to come out to do the shopping,Li Lei chose four coloured balloons,on which he wrote:Celebrating Children’s Day.Then he went to Wang Ping’s home with the balloons,and gave them to him as a gift.After that,Li Lei took him to the celebrations in the park.When the celebrations were over,he took Wang Ping back home.
Such is Li Lei,a good Young Pioneer.He is always ready to help others,especially those disabled ones.
篇4：高考英语第一轮总复习讲座之四（SBⅠ-Units 7-8）
一、单元考点提示
1.词汇:
point, line, hit , shake, kitchen, forever, scientist, movement, for a while,fall off ,cut off,stay up,a large number of ,a bit,at the time of ,sound like,feel the floor move,on the morning of April 18th,as strong as possible,soup,coffee,bowl,offer, corn,
discover,room,ship,fresh,cheese,ever before/ever since,just a little,ice cream,a bottle of…，just now,help yourself to…,all kinds of , in the 7th century, take turns,be crowded(with),do/try one’s best,move into…，be made into paper,in many different ways,both…and…
2、句型
(1)watch sb.do sth.
(2)…times as +adj./adv.+as…
(3)It is +n./adj.+(for/of sb.)to do sth
(4)I’ll teach you if you like
(5)What a delicious supper!
(6)…need as much water as rice.
(7)In many parts of the world,corn is made into powder
3、交际用语：
(1)Were you in…at the time of…
(2)Sure I was
(3)I’ll never forget that.
(4)What was it like?
(5)Very strange.
(6)It sounded like...
(7)What happened next?
(8)Would you like?
(9)How about some more...
(10)Just a little,please.
(11)No,thanks,I’ve had enough.
(12)I’m full,thank you.
(13)Help yourself to...
(14)Let me give you...
(15)There’s plenty(of it)
二、考点精析与拓展
1.above,over,on
三个词都可以表示“在……上“，但用法不同。On表示与某物体表面接触；over表示在某物体垂直的上方，含“布满、覆盖、跨越”之意，与under 相对；above表示位置高于，但不一定垂直，与below相对。注意：与数字、数量、长度词连用时，多用over,同more than。如：over10,000people一万多人；表示年龄、刻度多用above，如a man above fifty五十开外的人；above zero零度以上。
习惯用语：well above average远在一般以上；above sea-level海拔以上；the one above上面的一个；above all首先，尤其重要的是；over there 那边； all over 遍及；over again 再一遍；over and over再三地
[应用]介词填空
①There lay an umbrella_______the table and some raincoats
_____it.
②The mother held an umbrella______the boy’s head so that the sun wouldn’t burn him.
③ There seemed to be a war and many planes were flying____the city.
④The moon was______the trees in the east.
Key:①on,under ②over ③over ④above
2.afraid
1)“be afraid of+名词”，意为“害怕”。
2）“be afraid of doing sth”意为“担心，害怕……”。
3）“be afraid for…”意为“为……担心。”
4）“be afraid that…”意为“担心，恐怕”。
5）“be afraid to do ”意为“害怕，担心而不敢做某事”。
6）I’m afraid so/not.恐怕是这样/恐怕不会这样
[应用]完成句子
①女孩子一般都怕蛇。
Girls are usually______ _____snakes.
②他怕把杯子打碎，因而很小心。
He was careful because he was afraid______ _____the glass.
③你不为自己的安全担心吗？
Are you afraid_______your safety?
④恐怕她会迷路。
I am _____ _____she will lose her way.
⑤汤姆把钱丢了，也不敢告诉他母亲。
Tom lost the money and was afraid________ ______his mother.
Key:①afraid,of ②of,breaking ③for ④afraid,that ⑤to tell
3.cut短语归纳
1）用作动词：
get one’s hair cut理发；cut a loaf of bread in two 把一块面包一切为二；cut a figure in stone 雕刻石像；cut the price 降价；cut the article 删节文章；cut down trees 伐树；cut down on smoking减少吸烟；cut in 插嘴，插入，cut in with a few words插嘴讲几句话；cut off a corner切掉一角；cut off electricity切断电源；cut off three sentences删去三个句子；cut out切掉，删掉;cut out the last part of the play把剧本的最后一部分删掉；cut…open切开。
2) 用作名词：the cuts on one’s arms 臂上的伤口：make big cuts削减，降价
[应用]介、副词填空
①Big cuts have been made____the prices of medicine.
②The strong wind cut_____the electricity of the whole city.
③The chairman spoke so fast that nobody could cut____.
④All the trees were cut_____.They will have to answer for their foolish action
Key:①in ②off ③in ④down
4.fall短语归纳
fall from a tree从树上掉下来；fall off a table从桌子上落下；
fall out of bed 从床上跌下来；fall asleep入睡；fall ill病倒；fall behind落后；fall in love with sb.爱上某人；fall to pieces倒塌，垮台，崩溃，解体；fall into the water跌进水中；fall down 倒下；fall onto the ground掉（倒）在地上；have many falls 跌下许多跤；in the fall在秋季。
[应用]完成句子
①那个孩子从墙上掉下来伤着了右腿。
The boy____ ____the wall and hurt his right leg.
②他不想在学习上落后于别人。
He didn’t want to _____ ____others in his studies.
Key:①fell,off ②fall,behind
5.as…as
as many as 和……一样多/多达；as much as 和……一样多/多达（注意：many指可数的量，much 指不可数词的量）；as high as 和……一样高/高达；as thick as 和……一样厚/厚达；as long as 一样长/长达;as deep as 一样深/深达；as early as 一样早/早在……时候，如：
We have as many books as they.我们的书和他们的一样多。/The great fire burned down as many as twenty buildings.大火烧毁的大楼多达20座。
[应用]汉译英
①新桥与旧桥一样长。/这种鱼可长到长达15英尺。
②这座山和远处的另一座一样高。/这座山高达4000米。
Key:
①The new bridge is as long as the old one./The kind
of fish can grow as long as 15 feet.
②This mountain is as high as another one in the distance./This mountain is as high as 4,000 metres.
6.倍数的表示法
1）…times as…as“……是……的几倍”；
Asia is four times as large as Europe.
亚洲的大小是欧洲的4倍。
2）…times +形容词/副词比较级+that:
The new building is four times higher than the old one.
新楼比旧楼高4倍。
3）…times+the size/height/length/depth+of…
The earth is 49 times the size of the moon.
地球是月亮大小的49倍。
The ball is twice the width of our classroom.
舞厅是我们教室宽度的2倍。
4）…times+what从句：
The production now is three times what it was ten years ago.
现在的生产是前的3倍。
[应用]选择正确答案
①After the new technique was introduced,the factory
produced_____tractors in 1988 as the year before.(MET’90)
A．as twice many B.as many twice
C.twice as many D.twice many as
②The population of China is_____than that of America.
A.larger five times B.five times larger
C.five times as D.as five times
Key:①C ②B
7．形容词、副词各等级的修饰语
1）修饰原级的词：very,so,too,quite,rather,fairly,pretty.
2)修饰比较级的词：a little,a bit,slightly,any,much,a lot,a great deal,far,by far,rather,even,still,yet等。
3）修饰最高级的词：by far,much,almost,the second等。
注意：基数词、分数、百分数也可修饰比较等级。
[应用]完成句子
①恐怕箱子对你来说太重了，不过还是要谢谢你。
I’m afraid the box is ______heavy_____you,but thank you all the same.(MET’90)
②我的房间比你们的稍大一点。
Our room is ____ ____ than theirs.
③我比你早到三个小时。
I came here______ _____ _____ than you.
④黄河是中国第二长河。
The Yellow River is_____ _____ _____river in China.
Key：①too,for ②slightly,bigger ③three,hours,earlier④the,second,longest
8.join,join in, take part in ,attend
1)join 表示“加入党派，组织、社团、俱乐部”等。
如：join the Party/Youth League/army/club/organization入党/入团/参军/加入俱乐部/加入组织。
2)join in 表示“参加正在进行的活动”。如 ：join in a game /discussion/conversation/walk/talk参加游戏/讨论/谈话/一起散步/一起讨论。亦可说：join sb. in (doing)sth.表示“加入某人一起做某事”。
3)take part in 表示“参加会议、活动”，侧重说明主语参加并发挥一定作用，part 前若有修饰语，要用不定冠词。如:take (an active)part in a party/school activities/physical labour(积极)参加聚会/学校活动/体力劳动。
4)attend 表示“出席、参加会议、仪式、婚礼、葬礼、典礼、上课、上学、听报告”。如：attend a meeting/a sports meeting/a concer/a show/school/a lecture参加会议/运动会/出席音乐会/出席展览会/上学/听演讲。
[应用]完成句子
①我哥哥参军2年了。
It’s two years since my brother_______the army.
②我的朋友和我一起祝你生日快乐。
All my friends_______ ________ ________ wishing you a
happy birthday.
③今晚有一个聚会，你参加吗？
There will be a party this evening. Are you going to
_______ _________ _______ it?
④迈克没有参加莉莉的婚礼。
Mike didn’t ______ Lily’s wedding.
Key:①joined ②join，me,in③take,part,in ④attend
9.at表示速度、价格、利率
at a high/low price以高价/;低价；at 40 miles an hour 以每小时40英里的速度；at a high/low speed以高速/慢速；at an ordinary speed 以普通速度；at full/top speed以全速/高速；at a speed of 以……速度。
[应用]完成句子
①公司决定以较低的价格将这批电视卖掉。
The company decided to sell the TV sets ______ ______ ___
---- 。
②火车正以每小时150英里的速度前进。
The train was running ______ _____ ______ _______150 miles an hour .
Key:①at, a, low, price
②at,a, speed,of
10.动词 + off短语
fly off 飞走；go off 离开；take off 脱下，起飞；run off 跑开；fall off 掉下；turn off 关上；get off 下来；drive off 驶离；hurry off 匆忙离开；keep off 离开，勿靠近；pay off 还清（债）put off 推迟；send off驱逐；set off 出发，动身；throw off 扔掉，匆忙脱衣；ring off 挂断电话；
[应用]完成句子
①此处很危险，让孩子们离开。
It’s dangerous here.______ ______ the children.
②火车刚到，一大群人正在下车。
The train has just come in, with crowds of people______
_______it.
Key:①keep ,off ②getting, off
11.quite,rather与名词连用时冠词的位置
quite, rather表示“相当”意义与名词连用时，a/an可放在之前，亦可之后；但the 必须置于它们的前面。如:quite a big house/a quite big house相当大的一套房子。如：a quite easy problem/quite an easy problem相当容易的一个问题；a rather good player /rather a good player相当不错的一名运动员；the rather/quite tall tree 那棵相当高的树。
[应用]完成句子
①今天相当冷。
It’s _____ _____ cold day today.
②他是个相当不错的艺术家。
He is ______ ______ _______artist.
Key: ①rather,a ②quite,a ,good
12.discover
discover sth.发现某物；discover oneself暴露自己的身份；discover sb. doing sth.发现某人在做某事;discover sb./sth.to be…发现某人（物）……；discover + that 从句发现……常用搭配：discover one’s mistake/an island/the truth发现自己的错误/一座岛/事实的真相
[应用]完成句子
①我们发现他是一位出色的舞蹈家。
We ______her ______ _____ a good dancer./We _____ that
_______ _______a good dancer.
②有人发现她在偷东西。
Someone ______ ______ ______ things./Someone discovered that
______ ______stealing things.
Key:
①discovered，to, be/discovered, she, was
②discovered,her,stealing/she,was
13.room,space
room,space都可以用作不可数名词，表示“空间，余地”。另外，room
有“房间”之意，可数；space有“太空”之意，不可数。常用短语：live a room 5住在5号房间；three rooms三个房间；take up much room占很多空间；standing room 立足之地；in space 在太空
[应用]单句改错
①There is much rooms for improvement in our work.
②There isn’t enough spaces in this classroom for 30 desks.
③The universe exists in the space, as we all know.
Key: ①改rooms为room
②改spaces为space
③去掉space前的the
14.crowd
crowd 可用作名词，表示“人群，群”；用作动词，表示“群集，拥挤”。如:
a crowd of children一群孩子；crowds of books 成堆的书；a cheering crowd 欢呼的人群；crowd into 挤进；crowd in 拥入；crowd round围在……的周围；a crowded city/train拥挤的城市/火车；be crowded with 挤满、塞满
[应用]汉译英
①很多村民从大门拥入，院子里很挤。
②大厅里挤满了学生。
Key:
①Many villagers crowded in through the gate and the yard was
crowded.
②The hall was crowded with students.
15.prepare
prepare a plan/cards/a meal/one’s lessons 准备一个计划/卡片/一顿饭/备课；prepare sb.sth./prepare sth.for sb.为某人准备某物；prepare to do sth.准备做某事；prepare sb.for使某人对……进行准备；make preparations for 为做准备：
辩析：
①prepare one’s lessons(指教师)备课；prepare for one’s
lossons (指学生)准备功课
②prepare for “为……做准备”，侧重指动作；be(get)prepared
for “对某事从物质上，心理上做好了准备”是系结构，表示状态。对比：We are preparing for the final exam我们正在为期末考试做准备。/We are well prepared for the final exam.这次期末考试我们已完全做好了准备。
[应用]完成句子
①爸爸为我们准备了一顿丰盛的午饭。
Father _______ _____ a good lunch./Father ______ a good
lunch______ us.
②明天是儿童节。孩子们在准备去爬山。
Tomorrow is Children’s Day. The children are ______ _____
______climbing.
③我们必须让所有的人为可能的洪水做好准备。
We must_______ all the people______ the possible flood.
④外交部长对这样的问题没有思想准备。
The Foreign Minister ______ not______for such questions.
Key:
①prepared,us/prepared,for
②preparing, to ,go
③prepare,for
④was,prepared
16.offer
offer sth.提供，提出；offer sb.sth./offer sth.to(for)sb.
为某人提供、提出;offer to do sth.主动提出做某事；offer sb.sth.for(money)卖给某人要多少钱；offer sb.(money)for sth出钱买东西
短语：offer advice/suggestions/congratulations/the price提出劝告/建议/表示祝贺/出价；make an offer of help 主动提供帮助；accept one’s offer 接受某人的建议
[应用]完成句子
①他把座位让给了老人。
He ______his seat______ the old man./He _____the old man
His seat.
②我的同桌主动提出帮我学英语。
My deskmate_____ ______ _____ me with my English.
③有人出1万元买你的这套房子。
Someone will _____ you 10,000 yuan______ your house.
Key:①offered,to /offered
②offered,to ,help
③offer,for
三、经典名题导解
1.- Do you like the material?
-Yes,it_____ very soft.
A.is feeling B.felt C.feels D.is felt
解析：此题主要考查feel一词作系动词的用法。因为空格后面是形容词，所以谓语动词要用系动词的一船现在时，而不用它的被动语态和现在进行时。故正确答案为C。
点评：诸如 feel作系动词的用法的词还有：sound,taste, smell,
look等，经常被测试。需要注意的是这些系动词不用进时和被动语态。
2．After the new technique was introduced,the factory produced_______ tractors in 1988 as the year before.
A.as twice many B.as many twice
C.twice as many D.twice many as
解析：此题主要考查形容词中倍数的表达法。表示倍数、几分之几、百分之的单词或短语放在as(so)…as 或形容词比较级的前面。所以要填twice as many as。故答案为C。
点评：倍数的表达公式为：A is …times + adj./adv.(比较级)+that+B或A is...times+as+adj./adv.(原级)+as+B,答题时需注意属于哪一句式。
3．Mr Zhang gave the textbooks to all the pupils except _____ who had already taken them.
A.the ones B. ones C.some D.the others
解析：本题主要考查不定代词的用法区别。这是一个限定性定语从句。缺少先行词。the ones 表示特指，ones 表示泛指，不能作先行词，the others 意思是“剩余的”，与定语从句的语义重复，some亦为泛指。故答案为A。
点评：不定代词one、it、ones、the ones以及other、the other(s)在英语的语言运用中极为普及，需留意它们区别。
4.- ______ you like some more bread?
-I’m full, thank you .
A.Shall B.Will C.Are D.Would
解析：本题考查“would……like sth.”句型表示征求对方意见的用法。shall用于征询对方意见时常用于第一、三人称中，will 和would 常用于第二人称表示征求对方意见，但would语气更委婉，因此本题答案D恰当。
点评：情态动词是语法学习的一大难点，解这类题时应准确理解语意，把握语境。
5.Thank you very much for _______ you have done for my sister.
A.that B.which C.it D.what
解析：本题考查宾语从句在复合句中的用法。这是一个复合句，其中，you have done for my sister这个句子是作介词for的宾语，因此这是一个宾语从句，而从句中done是个及物动词，其后缺少了宾语。故答案选D。
点评：解复合句时，首先应分析句子结构，弄清句子结构后，根据不同的从句选用正确的连接词。
e.g.I don’t know where I can buy this map.
6.- Do you think I could borrow your dictionary?
- ________.
A.Yes, you may borrow B.Yes, you could
D.Yes, help yourself D.Yes, go on
解析：本题考查日常口语的使用。题中用could 是请求对方帮忙或同意自己做某事时婉转的用法。因此本题问话简略答语可以是“Yes,you can”而不是B项“Yes ,you could”，而A项不能省略代词it.D项意为“用吧”。故答案选 C恰当。意为“自己取用”。
点评：对于一些语意相近的答语应认真分析，逐一排除。
四、课后巩固训练
Ⅰ、单项填空
A）从A、B、C、D四个选项中找出其划线部分与所给单词划线部分读音相同的选项。
1.menu A.future B.run C.minute D.butcher
2.repay A.report B.pest C.fence D.rebuild
3.damp A.vase B.chance C.jam D.danger
4.answer A.twenty B.sweat C.wrong D.worth
5.excited A.regretted B.hoped C.watered D.played
B）从A、B、C、D四个选项中，找出能填入空白处的最佳答案。
6. -Hi,Carl.Have you ordered yet?
-No,_______at the menu.
A.I’m just looking B.I just look
C.I just lookedD.I have just looked
7. I don’t really work here;I_______until the new secretary arrives.
A.just help outB.have just helped out
C.am just helping out D.will just help out
8. -Is your father an engineer?
-Yes,_______.
A.he sure is B.he is sure C.sure is he D.sure he is
9. I’m so hungry now that I_______eat a whole ox.
A.must B.dare C.will D.could
10. The poor boy often had to_______supper.For he was an orphan.
A.do with B.go without C.go with D.deal with
11. I saw the girl_______her tears_______with her hands.
A.wipe;away B.wipe;off C.wash;away D.wash;off
12. He is often rude,but I still like him_______.
A.the same B.much the same C.just the same D.all same
13. -Do you think I could borrow your dictionary?
-_______.
A.Yes;you may borrowB.Yes;you could
C.Yes;help yourselfD.Yes;go on
14. I hardly_______to find you still here.
A.expected B.expect C.is expecting D.has expected
15. Some earn their living by_______crops,others by_______apples trees.
A.growing;planting B.planting;growing
C.growing;growing D.planting;planting
16. This map is wrong.I can’t_______where we are.
A.work out B.speak out C.carry out D.look out
17. This desert land can_______crops.
A.be used to grow B.be used for growing
C.use to grow D.be used to growing
18. After harvest peasants_______the soil with a tool_______by two oxen.
A.break up;pulled B.break up;pushed
C.break down;pulledD.break out;dragged
19. It has been suggested that the land_______equally among the peasants.
A.should share B.should be shared
C.divided into D.split out
20. She doesn’t talk much,but what he said_______.
A.makes sense B.makes no sense C.has a sense D.takes the sense
21. _______of you comes first will receive a prize.
A.Whatever B.Whichever C.Whoever D.Whenever
22. He_______through smoking.
A.ruined himself B.hurt him C.damaged him D.destroyed himself
23. I am looking forward as much to his return as he himself to_______me.
A.have seen B.seeing C.see D.be seen
24. _______,the earth is round.
A.As is well known to us B.It is well known to us
C.As it is well knownD.It is well known that
25. Their main business is_______cattle and crops.
A.raising B.keeping C.feeding D.supporting
Ⅱ、完形填空（共25小题，每小题1分，满分25分）
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从26-50各题所给的四个选项中，选出一个最佳答案。
Dear Jose:
You’ve asked me for suggestions on how to 26 in the United States.It is 27 ,to give advice,but I have found the following“do’s”and“don’ts” 28 .
As a 29 ,it isn’t to find anyone to 30 in a big city. 31 ,here are some suggestions.First,get or borrow 32 ! Walk him several times a day!Americans love dogs and usually stop 33 to anyone with a dog.Then,try to eat in a cafeteria(自助餐厅).People generally 34 the same tables and will sometimes talk to you 35 they see that you are a 36 .Next,take your dirty 37 to a laundry(洗衣店)! It takes about an hour to wash and dry,and many people 38 there.They often spend the 39 talking to the other customers.Always ask for information from a woman,if you are a 40 ,and from a man,if you are a woman!It seems to get 41 results for a reason I can’t understand. Learn the 42 ,“Please.”“Thank you.”and“You’re welcome.”before you come and use them all the time!They usually work like magic.
There are some things you 43 .Don’t tell the truth when people 44 “How are you?”They only 45 the answer to be“Fine”.Never ask people their 46 ---.Everyone wants to be young. 47 Don’t ask people for 48 .Every one wants to be 49 ,Don’t be late for appointment(约会)!When someone says six o’clock,be sure to be there by six. American respect 50 and expect everyone to be“on time”.
Above all,don’t worry!Just follow my advice and bring a lot of money and you will get along.I hope I have been of some help to you.
Cordially yours
Socrates
26.A.live B.walk C.play D.get along
27.A.possible B.difficult C.easy D.necessary
28.A.helpless B.help C.helpful D.useless
29.A.rule B.result C.law D.beginning
30.A.smile B.shout C.talk to D.run
31.A.Yet B.However C.But D.Besides
32.A.a dog B.much money C.a map D.a bike
33.A.talking B.and nod C.to wave D.to talk
34.A.have B.eat C.buy D.share
35.A.although B.before C.since D.if
36.A.stranger B.American C.worker D.student
37.A.clothes B.shoes C.water D.day
38.A.wait B.said nothing C.work D.become kind
39.A.cards B.time C.clothes D.discussion
40.A.policeman B.girl C.man D.stranger
41.A.worse B.fewer C.better D.no
42.A.English B.pronunciation C.spelling D.expressions
43.A.shouldn’t do B.can do sometimes C.should do D.forget
44.A.say B.ask C.tell D.talk
45.A.expect B.find C.reply to D.wait for
46.A.pay B.family C.age D.life
47.A.special B.especial C.specially D.especially
48.A.their way B.weight C.something D.light
49.A.thin B.rich C.fat D.heavy
50.A.elders B.knowledge C.time D.women
Ⅲ、阅读理解（共25小题，A节每小题2分，B节每小题1分，满分45分）
A）阅读短文，从每题所给的四个选项中选出最佳答案。
A
The American Thanksgiving Day(感恩节)Celebrations goes back to 1621.In that year a special dinner was prepared in Plymooth,Massachusetts,the colonists who had settled there had left England because of the religious problems.They came to the newland and faced difficulties in coming across the Atlantic Ocean.The ship which carried them called May Flower.They were helped in learning to live in the newland by the Indians who lived there.The puritans(清教徒),as they were called had much to be thankful for.They learned to change their forming habit to the weather and soil.
When they selected the fourth Thursday of November for their Thanksgiving celebration,they invited their neighbours,the Indians to join the main dinner.They thought of the group of 102 men,women and children who left England.They remembered their dead who did not live to see the shores of Massachusetts.
51. The Thanksgiving Day is about_______.
A.100 years oldB.200 years old
C.370 years oldD.400 years old
52. Why had they left England?_______.
A.Because of religious problems B.To look for the new land
C.To learn farming D.The name of an Indian
53. The May Flower was_______.
A.the city they left from B.the city they arrived in
C.the ship they travelled in D.the name of an Indian
54. The Indians had_______.
A.made life difficult for them B.helped them change their life
C.taken their land D.been afraid to talk to them
55. They gave thanks while remembering_______.
A.the new society of Indians
B.their parents
C.to invite the Indians
D.their friends who did not live to see the new land
B
In big cities,Americans do their grocery(食品杂货)shopping at large supermarkets.They usually shop once or twice a week,and when they go through the check-out stand(付款出口),their shopping cars are full of groceries.
A large supermarket is a big business.Although mainly selling foods of different kinds,supermarkets also handle other things including school and garden supplies, beer,toothpaste,toys,clothing,magazines,books and even medicines.The supermarket tries to meet the house wife’s every need so that when she leaves,she’ll shop nowhere else.
In order to attract customers,supermarkets have tried to make shopping as pleasant as possible.Some of them have flowers and trees in the parking place.Some have roofs cover the walks so that shoppers can walk from their cars to the store without having to worry about snow,rain or the hot sun.Most of the stores are air-conditioned.
With these and other improvements,supermarkets are becoming more and more popular.This is not limited to the United States.From Bankok to Buenos Aires.the old-styled grocery store is fast disappearing.In Europe,supermarkets have been growing in number since 1975.There is no doubt about it---more and more housewives around the world will soon be standing in the check-out lines.
56. The passage tells us that_______.
A.Americans never do grocery shopping more than twice a week.
B.it is a general practice for Americans to do grocery shopping once a week.
C.Americans are allowed to do grocery shopping only in supermarkets.
D.Americans supermarkets are better than those in other places of the world.
57. In the second paragragh,the passage says“The supermarket tries to meet the housewife’s every need…”What does“the supermarket”here means?
A.This very supermarket.
B.The supermarket mentioned above.
C.The only supermarket in the place where the house wives lives.
D.Supermarkets.
58. In the second paragragh.“…When she leaves,she’ll shop nowhere else.”means_______.
A.there are on other places where she can do shopping.
B.she’ll not be allowed to do shopping anywhere else.
C.she need not go to other stores to buy what she wants.
D.after she leaves,the shop will be nowhere to be found.
59. Supermarkets try to attract customers by_______.
A.selling flowers and trees in the parking place.
B.cutting the prices of their goods.
C.telling shoppers not to worry about snow,rain or the hot sun.
D.making shopping a pleasant thing for shoppers
60. The last sentence of this passage means_______.
A.fewer and fewer husbands around the world will have to do shopping.
B.more and more housewives will come to stand in the check-out lines,waiting to
be served.
C.supermarkets will soon become more and more popular around the world.
D.more and more housewives will have to stand in the check-out lines.
C
Everyone talks about the“five”senses of man.And it is true that we get our information about the outside world from our sense of sight,hearing,smell,touch and taste.Researchers tell us that the sense of sight---our visual sense---gives us up to 80% of what we know about the would outside of our bodies;while the other senses,the auditory(hearing),the olfactory(smell),the tactile(touch)and the gustatory(taste) bring into our brains information about the other twenty percent of what is happening.But there are two other senses that we cannot get along without,though they are seldom noticed.They are the sense of balance,without which we would act like a drunk(醉人)after a heavy drink,and the kinesthetic sense,which gives us our ideas about our own motion.
61. The sense of hearing,smell,touch and taste supply us with_______.
A.about half of our information about the world
B.about 20% of our information about the world
C.about 80% of our information about the world
D.all the needed information about the world
62. The other senses besides the“five”sense of man that the passage mentions are_______.
A.the tactile and the gustatory senses
B.the senses of balance and touch
C.the kinesthetic sense and the sense of balance
D.the olfactory and the auditory senses
63. According to the passage,one misses most about the world when one_______.
A.is deaf B.is blind
C.has no sense of touch and taste D.has no sense of balance and motion
64. We know our own movements as a result of_______.
A.the sense of balance B.the five senses
C.the kinesthetic sense D.the visual sense
65. What make the other senses different from the“five”senses?_______.
A.The other senses do not help us directly to learn about the world
B.The other senses helps us more directly to learn about the world
C.The other senses are more important
D.The other senses are even more important
D
Because plants can not move or speak,most people believe that they have no feeling and that they cannot receive signals from outside.Is this true?
People who study plants have found out that plants carry a small electrical charge(电荷).It is possible to measure this charge with a small piece of equipment called a“galvanometer”.The galvanometer is placed on a leaf of a plant,and it shows any change in the electrical field of the leaf.Human have similar electrical field which can change when we are shocked or frightened.
A man called Backster used a galvaometer for his studies of plants and was very surprised at the results.He found that if he had two or more plants in a room and he began to destroy one of them perhaps by pulling off its leaves or by pulling it out of its pot,the galvanometer on the leaves of other plants showed a change in electrical field.It seemed as if the plants were signalling a feeling of shock.This happened not only when Backster started to destroy plants,but when he destroyed other living things such as pets(害虫).
Another plant scientist,named Sauvin,gained similar results to Backster’s.He kept galvanometer fixed to his plants all the time and checked regularly to see what the plants were doing.He found that the plants were sending out signals at the exact time when he felt strong pleasure or pain.
A Japanese scientist called Hashimoto,who loved his plants dearly(非常),said that they could talk.He built an equipment which changed the electrical signals of plants into sounds.The sound were different when different things happened to the plants.For example,when they were moved to a new place or watered.Dr Hashimoto’s wife had talks with the plants.When she spoke to a plant,it answered with a signal which she could hear on Dr Hashimoto’s equipment.
66. A galvanometer is_______.
A.an electrical charge B.an equipment
C.an electrical field D.electricity
67. Backster was quite strange at the results of his studies because_______.
A.he destroyed a plant by pulling off its leaves and it showed a change in the
electrical field
B.he found plants could move and speak after all
C.he found plants could express feeling of shock
D.a pet on a leave was killed without signalling a feeling of shock
68. The plants sent out signals_______.
A.only when Backster started to destroy plants
B.only when he destroyed things such as pets
C.when Backster cut down a tree
D.when Backster destroyed plants or other living things
69. The plant scientist called Sauvin_______.
A.did not agree to Backster’s ideas
B.was against Backster’s conclusion(结论)
C.did not get the same sorts of results as Backster did
D.found out some of the same things Backster did
70. Dr Hashimoto’s plants could speak to Mrs Hashimoto because_______.
A.she talked to them
B.they were moved
C.his equipment changed their signals into sounds
D.they were able to make different sounds when different things happened to them
B）阅读对话，从文后的七个答案中选出五个填入文章空白处，有两个多余答案。
A: Mr brown,I’ve just come back from Mr Lin’s with a message that he won’t be able to see you this afternoon. 71 He feels sorry and will let you know as soon as he is free.
B: Oh,that’s all right.Mr Wang.It can’t be helped,I suppose.
A: He also told me to ask you whether you’d like to see his deputy(办理)Mr Zhang, and have a preliminary(预先的)discussion first.
B: 72 I will wait till Mr Liu si free.
A: 73
B: Well,I have always wanted to see something of the daily life of the Chinese people.I think I will take the opportunity to wander about the streets of Beijing.
A: Would you like me to come along with you?I can show you around.
B: Oh,no.Please don’t trouble yourself.I can find my own way.
A: 74
B: Thank you.I’m thinking of being dinner out.I want to see how ordinary people eat.
A: 75 Mr Lin might want to meet you.
A.No,there is no hurry.
B.He is going to meet you.
C.Could you be back by six?
D.Have a good time this afternoon.
E.He has just been called away to an important meeting.
F.May I ask what time you will be back?
G.Is there anything particular you’d like to do this afternoon instead?
Ⅳ、单词拼写（共10小题，每小题1分，满分10分）
76.He likes r_______ flower and dogs.
77.Many farmers’ field are i_______ by water.
78.Britain France and Germany are E_______ centuries.
79.He is active in politics.So he has become a p_______.
80.Please w_______ the words off the blackboard.
81.In this restaurant there are many _______(女服务员).
82.If there were mere grain,there would be no _______(饥饿).
83.The _______(丧失)of her son has aged here a lot.
84.The heavy rain will _______(毁坏)the crops.
85.After the exam,the boy _______(后悔)the days wasted playing.
Ⅴ短文改错（共10小题，每小题1.5分，满分15分）
We have to learn to say“sorry”too
when we beat someone’s feeling.We’ll have to 86._______
go up and say we’re sorry.When we have said a lie 87._______
and feel sorry,we will have to use some word.When we 88._______
have forgotten something or broke a promise, 89._______
we’ll have to explain to that word,too. 90._______
“Sorry”is a healing(平息争吵的)work,we can make 91._______
people to forget wrongs by using it sincerely. 92._______
This word is simple and important.Man 93._______
has to use it long ago.We have to use it now. 94._______
Our children have to use it again. 95._______
Ⅵ、书面表达（满分30分）
假定你是李涛-一所中学高三年级（3）班的学生。
请你仔细看下面的六张图画，以参加者的身份描述你参加一次课外活动的亲身经历和感受。
参考词汇：1、拔河-have a tug of war.
2、第一局-the first set.
参考答案
1-10 ADCCA ACADB 11-20 ACCAA ABABA 21-30 BABAA DBCAD
31-40 BADDD AAABC 41-50 CDABA CDBAC 51-60 DBCDC BDCDC
61-70 BCBCA BCDDC 71-75 EAGDF
76.raising 77.irrigated 78.European 79.politition 80.wipe 81.waitresses
82.starvation 83.loss 84.ruin 85.regretted
86.beat-hurt 87.said-told 88.same-the same 89.broke-broken 90.to-with
91. √ 92.去掉to 93.and-but 94.has-had 95.have-will have
One possible version:
I am Li Tao,a student of Class 3,Senior 3,Life at school is busy but interesting.
Last Friday afternoon just after class we had a tug of war with Class One on the playground.Each team had ten students,including five girls.
First,we did some exercises to warm up.Then the judge gave order and the game began.In about two minutes,we won the first set.Unfortunately,we lost the second.But we were not discouraged.We did our best and finally defeated them.The score was 2:1.We were the winner.
Although we were almost worn out,we were extremely excited and happy.
篇5：高考英语第一轮总复习讲座之十三（SBⅠ-Units 25-26）
一、单元考点提示
1.重点单词
repeat lady
serious joke
world-famous college
funny unable
note medical
earn gentleman
attend organize
suppose organizer
copy pound
live ton
African sail
fly non-stop
further concert
sale persuade
provide practise
total fortnight
realize
2.重点短语
send out 发出
get through 完成；通过；接通电话
ring back 回电话
out of breath 上气不接下气
turn down 拒绝；调低音量
call back 回电
ring off 挂断电话
for free 免费
start doing sth. 开始做
come to 总共；复活；谈到
3.重点句型
Will he make himself known to me ?
Would you mind giving a talk today about DNA?
There must be over two hundred here.
His greatest success has not been in singing but in organizing…
By the end of the year, the total money collected had come to over 92 million dollars, all of which were sent to Africa.
4.交际英语
Can you ring up…?/I can’t get through.
The line’s busy./I’ll try again later.
Could I speak to…,please?
Hold on please.
Can I take a message?
This is …speaking.
Can you…to ring me back ,please?
I’ll ask… to call you.
5.语法
学习must, may, might, can’t , could等情态动词的用法。
二、考点精析与拓展
1.send out 发出；放出
Some unknown flowers in the garden send out nice smell.
花园里有些不知名的花发出香味。
The sun sends out light and heat.太阳发光发热。
send 构成的其他词组：
2．ring up n.给……打电话
Could you please ring me up as soon as you come back?
请你一回来就给我打电话好吗？
Please ring up the train station and find out whether the train from Guangzhou has arrived or not.
请给火车站打个电话看看广州来的火车到站没有。
“打电话”的其他表达法：
ring构成的其他短语：
3.get through 接通电话；完成 ；通过
I can’t get through. The line’s busy.
我没能接通电话。占线了。
get through the work/ the exams/ the book
完成工作/通过考试/看完这本书
打电话的其他交际用语：
Can you ring up…?你能给……打电话吗？
I can’t get through.我没能接通（电话）。
The line is busy.(电话)占线。
I’ll try again later.一会儿我再试试。
Could I speak to…please?我找……接电话。
This is … speaking.我是……
Hold on ,please.请等一等。
Can I take a message .我可以捎个口信吗？
Could you ask…to ring me back.please?
你让……给我个回个电话好吗？
I’ll ask… to call you .
我要让……给你打个电话。
They are talking on/ over the phone.他们在通电话。
You are wanted on the phone.有电话找你。
She answered the phone.。她接了电话。
4.make up 编（造）；构成；化妆
It’s a lie. He made up the story.
这是谎言，都是他编造出来的。
Ten doctors made up a medical team.
十名医生组成了一支医疗队。
Although she doesn’t make up,she looks beautiful.
尽管不化妆，她依然美丽。
5.surprised adj.感到惊奇
They were surprised to hear the news.
他们听到那个消息感到很惊讶。
He was surprised at their visit.
他对他们的来访感到惊讶。
We are surprised that she can finish all these things in such a short time.
我们对她在短时间内做完这一切感到十分惊讶。
6.attention 短语
7.expert n.专家，能手 adj.精通的
an expert on computer science 计算机方面的专家
She’s expert at/ in looking after babies.
她对于照料婴儿很内行。
8.[辨析] can/ may/ must表推测的用法
can,may,must等都可用于表推测，但它们的含义和用法不同。
must语气最肯定，指“一定，必定”，只用于肯定句中。“must + 动词原形”表示对现在情况的推测；“must + have +done”表示对过去情况的推测。如：
Mum must be cooking supper now.
妈妈现在一定在做晚饭。
He must have finished his work.
他一定完成他的工作了。
may/ might 表示“或许，可能”。如：
Tom may go abroad next year.汤姆明年可能要出国。
She might have finished the work.
她可能已完成这项工作了。
He can’t know the answer.他不可能知道这个答案。
can/ could表示“可能，会”，多用于否定和疑问句中。如：
Could she he at home?她可能在家吗？
9.suppose vt.认为；猜测
we all supposed him to be honest.我们认为他老实。
I don’t suppose that I shall come back until eight o’clock.
我想一直要到八点钟我才返回。
-Will he come?他会回来吗？
-I suppose so.我想他会。
I suppose not./I don’t suppose so.我想他不会。
10.earn v.赚；得到
]
He earns $ 10,000 a year.他一年赚10，000英镑。
His honesty earned him great respect.
他因诚实而博得人们的尊敬。
She earned her living by singing in a nightclub.
她靠在夜总会唱歌谋生。
11.play vt. n. 弹，奏；打，玩
12.idea n.注意，想法
He thought and thought, and then he had an idea.
他想啊想，终于有了一个主意。
She had the idea of discussing the problem with her husband.
她有一个与丈夫商讨此事的办法。
I have an idea that he will lose.我认为他会输的。
Do you have any idea where he has gone?
你知道他到哪儿去了吗？
13.[辨析] manage to do/try to do
manage to do sth.意为“设法完成或做到某事”，含有成功之意。
He managed to organize a live concert.= He succeeded in organizing a live concert.
他设法组织了一次现场直播的音乐会。
try to do sth.意为“试图做，尽力做某事”，是否成功，并不肯定。
He tried to work it out ,but he failed.
他努力想把它算出来，但没成功。
14.realize vt.意识到；实现
realize one’s mistake 认识到自己的错误
realize one’s meanings 领会某人的意思
I didn’t realize that my English was limited until I was abroad。直到出国以后我才意识到自己的英语水平很有限。
She managed to realize her dream at last.
她终于设法实现了梦想。
15.persuade vt说服
Do you think you can persuade me?
你以为你能说服我吗？
She has persuaded her husband to give up smoking and drinking.
她已说服自己的丈夫戒烟戒酒。
The young man was persuaded out of the wrong idea.
那位年轻人被说服放弃了那种错误的想法。
[辨析] persuade/ advise
persuade sb. to do sth.意为“说服某人做某事”，强调劝说成功，说服；advise sb.to do sth.意为“劝说某人做某事”，不涉及劝说是否有效，相当于try to persuade sb.to do sth.如：
The doctor persuaded my father to give up smoking.
医生说服我爸爸戒了烟。
The doctor advised my father to give up smoking, but failed.
医生劝我爷爷戒烟，但没成功。
16.provide vt.提供；供给
The government provided food and houses for those who were homeless.
政府给无家可归的人提供食宿。
The school provides the students with textbooks./The school provides textbooks for the students.
学校为学生提供课本。
17.come to 达到，共计
The total cost of repairs came to about $ 100.
修理费总计约100美元。
The things I bought came to 100 yuan..
我购物总计花了100元。
The cost of the trip totaled/came to /added up to 1000 dollars.
这次旅行的费用共计1000美元。
三、精典名题导解
1.They decided to_______ a large medical conference.
A.found B.form C.set up D.organize
解析：organize 为“组织”之意。又如：
organize a football team/a concert/ a get-together
组织一支足球队/一场音乐会/一次聚会。
答案：D
2.I was about to ______the phone when it was________.
A.reply; rung off B.receive; rung up
C.answer; rung off D.answer; rung up
解析：从句意可知，不能选择B、D。“接电话”应为answer/ reply to the phone.句意为“我正准备接电话，电话挂断了”。
答案：C
3. John_____the examination,which made his parents happy.
A.got through B.carried on
C.stuck to D.kept on
解析：carry on继续开展，进行下去；stick to 坚持；keep on 继续，都不适合句子语境意义。
答案：A
4.The exciting performances attracted the passers- by’s _________.
A.notice B.attention C.patience D.taste
解析：notice的搭配为：take notice of 注意；patience耐心；taste口味，胃口。
答案：B
5. Peter________ come with us tonight, but he isn’t sure.(NMET 1993)
A.must B.may C.can D.will
解析：从he isn’t sure yet可知，应用may.
答案：B
6. -There were already five people in the car , but they managed to take
me as well.
-It ______ a comfortable journey.（NMET1995）
A.can’t B.shouldn’t be
C.must have been D.couldn’t have been
解析：因对话是对过去事情的推测，所以不能选择A和B。从上句意义可知，“已坐5个人的小车里再挤一个人一定不会是舒适的施行。”
答案：D。
7. The lion is considered the king of the forest as it a(n) _________ of courage.
A.example B.sign C.mark D.symbol
解析：symbol“象征”。而example“榜样；例子”，sign“签字；迹象”，mark“标记；足迹”都不合句意。
答案：D
8.He _________me to keep away from cigarette and to morning exercises every day.He really did.
A.agreed B.suggested C .promised D.wished
解析：A promises B to do 中to do为宾语，其逻辑主要为A。A wishes B to do 中to do 为宾补，其逻辑主语为B。agree,suggest不用于“动词+sb. + to do”结构。
答案：C
9. It’s important for us to employ a word or a phrase according to the _______ in language studies.
A.situation B.expression
C.condition D.translation
解析：situation在此表示“语境，上下文”。
答案：A。
四、课后巩固训练
Ⅰ、单项填空（共25小题，每小题1分；满分25分）
A）从A、B、C、D中找出其划线部分与所给单词的划线部分读音相同的选项。
1.medical A.research B.devote C.anything D.decide
2.sink A.thinking B.strange C.merchant D.defend
3.thirst A.sunburnt B.energy C.information D.pardon
4.faith A.breathe B.thus C.birth D.baths
5.reuse A.replace B.recycle C.review D.require
B）从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳答案。
6. Madame Curie succeeded_______radium and won the Nobel Prize_______physics.
A.to find;for B.in finding;in C.in finding;for D.to find;in
7. _______is known to all,the first atom bomb_______over Hiroshima.
A.It;set off B.As;was set off
C.That;set out D.What;was set out
8. _______Mr Green called you just now but he didn’t tell me his full name_______reason.
A.A;for some B.A certain;because of a
C.Some;since a D.The;because of some
9. I’ve just learned the news that Mr Smith_______ill for some time last month.
A.has been B.was C.had been D.fell
10. He_______the person refered to be put into prison.
A.said B.suggested C.agreed D.believed
11. The captain was the last one_______the_______ship.
A.leaving;sunk B.left;sinking
C.to leave;sinking D.to have left;sunk
12. -Can you take a few days off to go with me to New York?
-_______,_______my way and I’ll be glad to.
A.Surely;please pay B.Certainly;if you pay
C.Sure;pay D.Of course;paying
13. The workers of the Capital Steel Works have produced_______iron and steel this year as they did last year.
A.as twice many B.twice more C.as twice much D.twice as much
14. He was absent for two weeks,so he had a lot of homework to_______.
A.take up B.put up C.pick up D.make up
15. No one knew why the_______plan was finally defeated.
A.carefully made B.careful made
C.carefully making D.careful making
16. -Do you think I_______borrow your book?
-Yes,_______yourself.
A.might;take B.should;fetch C.would;bring D.could;help
17. The old lady said she often went_______and sometimes almost starved_______in the old days.
A.hungry;deadly B.hunger;death
C.hungry;to death D.hunger;dead
18. His careless speech_______much argument.He regretted_______that at the meeting.
A.resulted in;sayingB.caused to;to have said
C.resulted from;having said D.led to;to say
19. -_______,please.
-Coffee_______milk or black coffee?
A.Two coffee;andB.Two coffees;with
C.Two cups of coffee;or D.Two cups of coffees;in
20. _______in the desert towards evening,the travelers had to put up a tent for_______night.
A.To lose;a B.Losing;不填C.Lost;the D.To have lost;a
21. -Will the new products sell well?
-If they_______,then we’ll_______an extra 1 million dollars next year.
A.do;bring in B.will;bring out
C.sell well;take in D.can;get
22. -Is this the watch you wish to_______?
-Yes,it is.
A.repair itB.have it repaired
C.to be repaired D.have repaired
23. -Is your father still an engineer?
-_______.
A.Yes,he wasB.He didn’t use to
C.No,but he used to D.No,but he used to be
24. What would you like for lunch?_______.
A.To eat anything B.Eating anything
C.To eat something D.Eating something
25. The reason for his success is_______he worked hard.
A.why B.because C.that D.for
Ⅱ、完形填空（共25小题，每小题1分；满分25分）
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从26-50各题所给的四个选项中，选出一个最佳答案。
It was very cold in Paris.That was the day the children got shoes.Not all the children of Paris,of course-just a 26 300.
The shoes had been 27 from the United States by the American Red Cross. 28 World War Ⅱ was over,Europe 29 practically everything.But food came 30 in shipping space.That was 31 only 300 pairs of shoes had arrived in paris.
The French Red Cross had 32 that the children in Drancy were the neediest.Drancy was a poor area in Paris.
When we 33 to the school house at Drancy,the shoes-al new ones-were spread out on long tables.Inside 34 pair was a chocolate bar.On top was a flower.“The children brought the flowers,”a teacher explained.“It is like a big 35 when they get new shoes.”
The children came in quiet,orderly 36 .We looked at their feet.Some were 37 wooden shoes.Others had open sandals(凉鞋)made of a cloth sole(鞋底)held on by two straps(布条),there were some grownups’ worn-out shoes,much too 38 .
The children lined up around the long tables,hands at their 39 .Only the shine of their eyes and now and then a nudge(推)proved that they had 40 their shoes.Nobody laughed or talked.
Then at signal 41 their teacher,their thin,sweet 42 sang the Marseillaise(马赛曲).After that,members of the French and American Red Cross made 43 .At last they formally presented(移交)the shoes.
The children stood patiently 44 .When the speeches done,they all shouted:“Thank you!”Then the children began to 45 out quietly.A few girls came up 46 offering a piece of paper on which they had printed their thanks.But no one had 47 the shoes.No one looked disappointed.I stopped a teacher and asked,“When do they try their shoes?”
“Tomorrow.”
“Why not 48 ?”
Se shook her head,smiling.“Today they have seen them.That is 49 .They are very happy.They will be happy all through the night.Do you know what a wonderful thing it can be just to 50 new shoes?”
26.A.little B.lucky C.poor D.happy
27.A.taken B.chosen C.brought D.bought
28.A.As B.While C.So D.Although
29.A.hoped B.asked C.needed D.carried
30.A.first B.last C.later D.only
31.A.where B.because C.how D.why
32.A.asked B.reported C.answered D.told
33.A.flew B.ran C.went D.got
34.A.one B.each C.this D.every
35.A.holiday B.gift C.luck D.chance
36.A.lines B.rows C.groups D.sides
37.A.putting on B.wearing C.showing D.carrying
38.A.small B.hard C.large D.dear
39.A.sides B.shoes C.bodies D.heads
40.A.wanted B.cleaned C.found D.noticed
41.A.from B.with C.to D.off
42.A.sounds B.tongues C.voices D.mouths
43.A.notes B.speeches C.talks D.dialogues
44.A.breathing B.crying C.listening D.laughing
45.A.march B.call C.show D.let
46.A.freely B.slowly C.shyly D.quickly
47.A.moved B.reached C.seen D.touched
48.A.morning B.today C.afternoon D.yesterday
49.A.all B.enough C.right D.good
50.A.hope B.wait C.expect D.look for
Ⅲ、阅读理解（共25小题，A节每小题2分，B节每小题1分；满分45分）
A）阅读下列短文，从每题所给的四个选项中，选出最佳答案。
A
Sam was an old farmer.He was born on his farm and had lived on it all his life. He had married his neighbour’s daughter,and grew fruits and vegetables.
Sam got up at five o’clock every morning together them and take a load(货物)off to the market in his old truck.
There was very little traffic on the country roads at that time of the morning,and Sam knew how to get to the market very well,so as he was going along,he was always thinking about everything except his driving.
One morning he was thinking about what crops to plant for the next year’s harvest,and whether to try something else.A lot of other farmers were planting the same things which he produced,so the prices in the market were coming down and he was getting less money.
After a few kilometres,Sam came to a place where the small road which went in the direction of the market crossed a bigger one,and he continued over it without stopping.He always crossed the big road like that,because there was never any traffic on it at that time of the morning,so there was no fear of having an accident,and anyway he was always in a hurry,because he wanted to get to the market in time for its opening.
But this morning a young policeman whom he had never seen before signed to him to stop 100 metres beyond the crossroad.
Sam stopped beside the policeman,and the policeman said to him,“Didn’t you know that there was a sign telling you to stop at the crossroads before going over the main road?”i9
“Oh,yes,”answered Sam,“I knew that there was sign at that point,because I go to the market along this road every morning.But I unfortunately didn’t to know that you were here.”
51. According to the passage,we can infer that the load Sam takes off to market every morning can not be_______.
A.tomatoes B.corn C.oranges D.bananas
52. On the way to the market,Sam_______.
A.drove his old truck very carefully
B.thought about how much money he could make
C.planned how to get to the market earlier
D.paid little attention to his driving
53. From the passage we can see Sam is_______.
A.an honest hard working person
B.an aged experienced farmer with humour
C.a thoughtful and careful fellow
D.an old funny man
54. Which of the following correctly shows the situation described in the passage?
B
When my first wartime Christmas came,I was in basic training in New Jersey and not sure if I could make it home for the holidays.Only on the afternoon of December 23 was the list of men who would have three day passes posted.I was one of the lucky soldiers.
It was Christmas Eve when I arrived,and a light snow had fallen.Mother opened the front door.I could see beyond her,into the corner of the living room where the tree had always stood.There were lights,all colours,shining against the green of a pine.
“Where did it come from?”I asked.
“I asked the gate boy to cut it,”my mother said.“I wouldn’t have had one just for myself,but when called-oh,such a rush! He just brought it in the afternoon…”
The pine reached to the proper height,almost to the ceiling,and the Tree Top Krystal Star was in its place.A few green branches reached about a little disorderly at the side,I thought,and there was a bit of bare trunk showing in the middle.But the tree filled the room with warm light and the whole house with the pleasant smell of Christmas.
“It’s not like the one you used to find,”my mother went on.Yours were always in good shape.I suppose the gate boy didn’t know where to look.But I couldn’t be critical.
“Don’t worry,”I told her.“It’s perfect.”
It wasn’t,of course,but at the moment I realized something for the first time: all Christmas are perfect.
55. From the passage,we can infer that_______.
A.the writer spent his first Christmas during the war
B.all soldiers did not go home for Christmas during the war
C.all the soldiers had three-day passes
D.the writer did not want to go home for Christmas at first
56. When the writer got home,_______.
A.it was December 23
B.it was snowing heavily
C.he found a Christmas tree in the living room
D.the gate boy was cutting a Christmas tree for his mother
57. From the passage,we can conclude that_______.
A.the writer used to cut very beautiful Christmas trees
B.his mother didn’t like perfect trees
C.his mother didn’t want to have a pine tree
D.the writer wouldn’t have a tree cut by someone else
58. “All Christmas trees are perfect”,because they can remind you of_______.
A.the war time B.the green of a pine
C.the pleasant smell D.the sweet home
59. The best title for this passage would be_______.
A.How to Choose Christmas Tree B.How Soldiers Spent Christmas
C.Perfect Christmas TreeD.Christmas with A tree
C
The Atlantic Ocean is one of the oceans that separate the old world from the new.For centuries it kept the Americas from being discovered by the people of Europe.Many wrong ideas about the Atlantic made early sailors unwilling to sail far out into it.One idea was that it reached out to “the edge of the world”.Sailors were afraid that they might sail right off the earth.Another idea was that at the equator the ocean would be boiling hot.The Atlantic Ocean is only half as big as the Pacific,but it is still large.It is more than 4,000 miles wide where Columbus crossed it.Even at the narrowest it is about 2,000 wide.Two things made the Atlantic rather unusual.For so large an ocean it has very few islands.Also,it is the world’s saltiest ocean.
60. If sailors sail westward far into the Atlantic they will finally reach_______.
A.the equator B.one of the other oceans
C.one of the Americas D.the edge of the world
61. One reason why early sailors were unwilling to sail far into the ocean was that_______.
A.at the equator the ocean was boiling hot
B.they would reach the New World
C.they were afraid of falling off the edge of the world
D.the earth was not round
62. One of the facts that make the ocean unusual is that_______.
A.it’s salty and large
B.it’s half as big as the Pacific
C.its water is the saltiest in the world
D.it’s so large an ocean with so few islands
D
How many coins have you got in your pocket right now? Three? Two? Only one?
With a phonecard you can make up to 200 calls without any change at all.
1.What do you do with it?
Go to a telephone box marked “Phonecard”.Put in your card,make your call and when you’ve finished,a screen tells you how much is left on your card.
2.Now appear in a shop near you.
Near each cardphone place you’ll find a shop where you can buy one.They’re at bus,train and city tube(地铁)station.
Many universities,hospitals and clubs,restaurants and gas stations on the highway and shopping centres.
At airports and seaports.
3.No more broken payphones.
Most broken payphones are like that because they’ve been vandalished(故意破坏).There are no coins in cardphone to excite thieves’ interest in it.So you’re not probably to find a vandalished one.
Get a phonecard yourself and try it out.Or get a bigger waller.
63. The passage is most probably_______.
A.a warning B.a note C.an advertisement D.an announcement
64. There are three sections(部分)in the passage.Which section do you think is about why phonecards are good?
A.Section 1 B.Section 2 C.Section 3 D.None
65. Choose the right order of the steps under“How you use a phonecard.”
a.Put in your phonecard.
b.Look at the screen to find out how many calls you can still make.
c.Go to a telephone box marked“Phonecard.”
d.Make your call.
A.a-b-c-d B.c-a-d-b C.a-d-c-b D.c-d-a-b
E
Around the world more and more people are taking part in dangerous sports and activities.Of course,there have always been people who have looked for adventure-those who have climbed the highest mountains,explored unknown parts of the world or sailed in small boats across the greatest oceans.Now,however,there are people who seek an immediate thrill from a risky activity which may only last a few minutes or even seconds.
I would consider bungee jumping to be a good example of such an activity.You jump from a high place(perhaps a bridge or a hot-air balloon)200 metres above the ground with an elastic rope tied to your ankles.You fall at up to 150 kilomtres an hour until the rope stops you from hitting the ground.It is estimated that 2 million people around the world have now tried bungee jumping.Other activities which most people would say are as risky as bungee jumping involve jumping from tall buildings and diving into the sea from the top of high cliffs.
Why do people take part in such activities as these? Some psychologists suggest that it is because life in modern societies has become safe and boring.Not very long ago,people’s lives were constantly under threat.They had to go out and hunt for rood,diseases could not easily be cured,and life was a continuous battle for survival.
Nowadays,according to many people,life offers little excitement.They live and work in comparatively safe environments;they buy food in shops;and there are doctors and hospitals to look after them if they become ill.The answer for some of these people is to seek danger in activities such as bungee jumping.
66. A suitable title for the text is_______.
A.Dangerous sports;what and why?
B.The boredom of modern life
C.The need for excitement
D.Bungee jumping:Is it really dangerous?
67. More and more people today_______.
A.are trying activities such as bungee jumping
B.are climbing the highest mountains
C.are coming close to death in sports
D.are looking for adventures such as exploring unknown places
68. In bungee jumping,you_______.
A.jump as high as you can
B.slide down a rope to the ground
C.tie yourself to a rope and fall to the ground
D.fall towards the ground without a rope
69. People probably take part in dangerous sports nowadays because_______.
A.they have a lot of free time
B.they can go to hospital if they are injured
C.their lives lack excitement
D.they no longer need to hunt for food
70. The writer of the text has a_______attitude towards dangerous sports.
A.positive(肯定的) B.negative(否定的) C.neutral(中立) D.nervous
B）根据对话内容，从对话后的选项中，选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。
--Hello! This is Mrs White.
--Hello! This is Frank Hardson,Professor White’s student.I’d like to make an appointment to see Professor White.
-- 71 When would you like to come?
--Well,I’m free next week.
--I’m afraid he won’t be at home next week 72 .
--Well,I see.This afternoon I’ll see an exhibition in the Captain Hall,which is near
your home. 73 .
--Yes,he is at home this afternoon.And he is free before 3 o’clock.
--Oh,I won’t reach your home before 3.Can I see him between 3 and 4?
-- 74 He has another appointment with Professor Hunter,and you won’t see him,unless
you come before 3.
--Well,all right. 75 Two o’clock this afternoon.
--Fine,then Bye!
--Bye!
A.It’s hard to say.
B.We’ll be on holiday then.
C.I’ll give up the exhibition.
D.Can I drop in after that?
E.Certainly.
F.I’m afraid not.
G.It’s too bad.
Ⅳ、单词拼写（共10小题，每小题1分；满分10分）
根据下列句子及所给汉语注释或首字母提示，写出空缺处每个单词的正确形式。（每空只写一词）
76.It is the_______(性质)of the radioactive matter to give off rays.
77.A crowd of customers g_______together in front of the shop,demanding to see the
manager.
78.The growth of industry has been slowed down in r_______years.
79.As expected,the girl married the_______(英俊)young man in the end.
80.The population of the world is_______(增长)every year.
81.Many people were fooled by the f_______news that the price of TV sets would rise
sharply.
82.His_______(决心)to marry Jane is now much stronger than ever.
Nothing would stop him.
83.It was a_______that they should have finished the job in such a short time.
84.I can’t find the book.It’s n_______to be found.
85._______(苍蝇)are very dirty and carry disease.
Ⅴ、短文改错（共10小题，每小题1.5分，满分15分）
Life is made up from success and failure.No 86._______
one is always success and also no one is always 87._______
a failure.So it doesn’t make much different 88._______
whether you are successful or not.The most 89._______
important is simply that you do before your 90._______
success or failure.If you lost heart when you fail, 91._______
or show proud when you succeed,you will 92._______
never succeed.Instead,you should face to it 93._______
bravely and keep with your courage when you 94._______
fail,your failure can be changed into a success. 95._______
Ⅵ、书面表达（满分30分）
今年是世界环境保护年。请根据下面要点写一篇短文，谈谈你对污染的看法（100-120单词）。
1、当今污染已成为全球问题。空气、河海、土壤的污染对人类和动物十分有害。
2、列举2-3种污染的原因和产生的严重的后果。
3、希望科学家采取有效办法，控制污染、净化空气，保护生态平衡。
注意：应包括以上所有要点，但不能逐字翻译，语言要通顺连贯
参考答案
1-10 CAACB CBABB 11-20 CCDDA DCABC
21-30 ADDBC BDBDB 31-40 DBDBA ABCAD
41-50 ACBCA CDBBC 51-60 BDBDB CADCC
61-70 CDCCB AACCC 71-75 EBDFC
76.nature 77.gathered 78.recent 79.handsome 80.Increasing 81.false 82.determination 83.astonishing 84.nowhere 85.Flies 86.from-of 87.success-a success 88.different-difference 89.√ 90.that-what 91.lost-lose 92.proud-pride 93.去掉to 94.with-up 95.your-and/then your
Ⅵ.
Today pollution has become a serious problem to our earth and our air,seas,rivers and land have been polluted by waste or poisonous too.It does really harm not only to human beings but also to animals.We do not have fresh air because many factories have poisonous smoke into the air.Fish die from the polluted water.I is said that some diseases have appeared in some places because of pollution.
I hope scientists can do something to solve the serious problem.At last we can pollution can be controlled and air can be cleaned.On the other hand,we can keep balance of the nature.
篇6：高考英语第一轮总复习讲座之十一（SBⅠ-Units 21-22）
一、单元考点提示
1.before long;long before
before long 意为“不久、很快”（soon,after a short period of time）,其中的before是介词，long是名词，在句中作状语，常与将来时或过去时连用。如：
Before long he had to move on again.
long before意为“很久以前”，其中的long是副词。long before单独使用时，before是副词。long before后接名词或代词时，before为介词。long before后接从句时，before为连词。该词组常与过去时、过去完成时连用。如：
They heard of it long before.
I knew your brother long before I knew you.
2.force; make
force和make均有“迫使”之义，但有区别。force常含有暴力威胁之意，常用于“force+名词/代词+带to的不定式”结构。如：
When he was still a young man, he was forced to leave his homeland for political reasons.
The PLA men forced the enemy to surrender(投降).
make 所表示的迫使意义没有force强，常用于“make+名词/代词+省略to的不定式”结构。如：
What makes you think I’m a worker?
How did Lin Feng make the baby stop crying?
注：当make用于被动语态时，其后作主语补足语的不定式要带to。如：The workers were made to work ten hours a day.
3.such… that;so…that
such…that和so…that 引导的都是结果状语从句。一般such+名词+that,so+形/副词+that，其具体用法如下：
（1）such… that:
①such修饰单数可数名词，即such+a/an+(形)+单数可数名词，如：
It was such a hot day that nobody wanted to do anything.
This is such a good book that I have read it several times.
②such修饰复数可数名词，即：such+(形)+复数可数名词，如：
These are such small shoes that I can’t wear them.
③such修饰不可数名词，即：such+(形)+不可数名词，如：
He made such rapid progress that he did well in mid-term examination.
④such与one,no等词一起修饰名词时，这些词要放在such的前面，即：
one
no
any
all 单数可数名词
many +such+ 复数可数名词 ,如:
some 不可数名词
several
few
He has made some such mistakes.
I have met many such people.
One such book is enough.
There is no such a word in the dictionary.
All such story-books must be collected.
I have few such good books.
I have never met any such persons.
注：such a lot of +名词，而不能说a lot of such+名词。
（2）so…that
①so修饰形容词或副词，即：so+ 形/副+that，如：
Mr Wang is so busy that he can’t leave his office.
He ran so fast that I couldn’t catch up with him.
②so也可以修饰名词，但该名词前必须有many,few,little等表示数量多少的词修饰。如：
many
so+ +可数名词复数
few
much
so+ +不可数名词复数
little
该句型只能用so,而不能用such,如：
I have had so many falls(跌了那么多跤)that I’m black and blue(青一块紫一块)all over.
He has so few friends that he often feels lonely.
Teachers in our school have so much work to do that they are busy all day.
John has so little money that he can’t buy the book.
(3)such…that与 so…that 的相互转换
当被修饰部分是“ a/an+形容词+名词”时，以上两个句型可以通过调整a或an的位置进行互换。即：
such a/ an+形容词+名词+that…=so+形容词/a/an+名词+that…。如：
It is such a good book that I have read it several times.
=It is so good a book that I have read it several times.
This is such an important meeting that you should attend it.
=This is so important a meeting that you should attend it.
注:当被修饰的部分是“形容词+复数名词或不可数名词”时，二者不能进行转化。如：
such good students 不能改为：so good students.
such rapid progress 不能改为：so rapid progress.
4.advice 的用法
advice的用法有如下几点值得注意：
(1)advice表示“忠告、建议”，是不可数名词。表示忠告的数量，要借助piece 来表达。如：
a piece/two pieces of advice一条/两条建议
(2)advice后接that从句，从句的谓语常用“（should+）动词原形”构成的虚拟语气。如：
The doctor gave his father advice that he (should)not smoke any more.医生建议他的父亲不要吸烟了。
(3)give advice on表示“在……方面提出建议”，后面的 on 有时可改为 about。如：
He gave us some advice on/about how to study well.他给我们提了些如何搞好学习的建议。
5.表示年龄的介词
(1)表示“在某人十几岁/二十几岁/三十几岁……九十几岁”时，用介词in,即构成短语“in one’s teens/twenties/thirties…nineties”。如：
When Marx was already in his fifties,he found it important to study the situation in Russia.当马克思五十几岁时，他发现研究俄国形势很重要。
(2)表示某人超过多少岁时，用介词over或above。如：
My father is a man above fifty.我父亲是一个五十多岁的人。
He didn’t get married until he was over forty.他直到四十多岁才结婚。
(3)表示某人不到多少岁时，用介词under或below。如：
People below eighteen years of age have no rights to vote.不到十八岁的人没有选举权。
The teachers here are all under thirty years old.这里的老师都不到三十岁。
(4)表示某人大约多少岁时，用介词about或 around。如：
The men invited yesterday is about sixty.昨天被邀请的人约六十岁。
(5)表示某人接近多少岁时，用介词towards或near。如：
The old many towards 100 years old passed away last year.那个差不多满百岁的老人去年去世了。
(6)表示某人正好多少岁时，用介词at或介词短语 at the age of。如：
My father began to make a living at 15/at the age of 15.我父亲在十五岁时开始谋生。
另外，也可用“介词of+数词”来表达，不过此短语常作后置定语。如：
When Edison was a boy of sixteen,he invented many things.当爱迪生还是一个十六岁的孩子时，他就发明了许多东西。
6.die用法小结
(1)“死亡”是个终止性动词，不能用完成时态，如果要与表示一段时间的状语连用时，需使用其形容词形式dead（死的）。如：
He died ten years ago.
He has been dead for ten years.
(2)没有进行时，如果用进行时，则表示“渐渐死去、快死去、渴望”的含义。如：
The dog is dying.
She is dying to know the result.
(3) 与die构成的一些动词词组：
①die away“逐渐消失、平息”。如：
The sound has died away.
②die by“死于……”，常与暴行、刀剑等词搭配。如：
The thief died by sword(刀剑)。
③die for “为……而死”。如：
He died for the people. His death is as heavy as Mount Tai
④die from“由于……而死”，后常接灾祸、衰弱、负伤等外因。
He died from a chest wound.(胸部受伤)
He died from weakness.(衰弱)
⑤die of“因（患）……而死”，后常接年老、疾病、情感、贫寒等内因的死。如：
The baby died of a fever.
The old woman died of grief(悲伤)soon after her husband’s death.
⑥die out“熄灭、绝种（迹）”。如：
The lights died out suddenly.
Many old customs are gradually(逐渐地)dying out.
7.同源宾语用法
一般来讲，不及物动词不能带宾语。但英语中有些不及物动词可带上与该动词同根的名词作宾语，语法上称作“同源宾语”。可带同源宾语的动词常用的有：
live,smile,dream,die,breathe,laugh,sleep,sing,fight,run等。
(1)live a happy/hard/simple/quiet/miserable life过着幸福/苦难/俭朴/安静/悲惨的生活，如：
In the past people lived a hard life but now they are living a happy life.
(2)smile a forced smile勉强笑笑，如：
He smiled a forced smile at me and went away.
(3)dream a wonderful/bad/terrible dream做美/恶梦
(4)die a heroic/glorious death英勇就义/光荣牺牲
die a sudden death突然死去
(5)breathe a deep breath做深呼吸，如：
It is good for us to breathe a deep breath in the morning.
(6)laugh a merry laugh开心一笑
laugh a foolish laugh傻笑
(7)sleep a sound sleep熟睡，睡得极甜
sleep a comfortable sleep睡得很舒服
(8)sing a wonderful/beautiful song唱着优美的歌曲
(9)fight a victorious battle 打胜仗
(10)run a fast race快跑
以上可看出同源宾语的特点：
(1)同源宾语前面常有形容词修饰。
(2)同源宾语前常用不定冠词修饰
(3)separate…from;divide…into
divide表示“分开、划分、分割”，引申表示“意见不合、使不合”的意思，侧重把某一整体的人或物分成若干份。如：
Ireland is divided into two countries.
爱尔兰被分成两个国家。
注意：divide后可接into和among,即divide A into B,意为：把A划分成B；divide sth.among/between sb.常指把一具体东西分给几个或更多的人。如：
The teacher divided the boys from the girls.老师把男孩子和女孩子分为两组。
He divided the cake among the children.他把蛋糕分给孩子们。
separate表示“分离”“分隔”，常与from连用。指把原来连在一起的或靠在一起的人或物分隔开，使之间隔一段距离。另外，separate可用做形容词，表示“单独的”。如：
The two islands are separated by the Irish Sea.两个岛屿被爱尔兰海分隔开来。
The patients should be separated from the others.这些病人应当隔离。
8. part of ;a part of
二者可接单、复数可数或不可数名词，名词前要有the,these,your等限定词。尽管两个词组都表示“部分”，但词义范围有所不同。a part of指整体的一半以下，一小部分。如：
A great part of the city was destroyed.市内很大一部分地区被毁。
part of指整体的一半或一半以下。part of 中的part可用复数parts.如：
I’ve read part of the book.这本书我看了一部分。
In many parts of the world corn is made into powder.世界上有许多地方把玉米磨成粉。
注意：若强调某物是整体的不可分割的一部分，往往只用part of.如：
Taiwan is part of China’s territory. 台湾是中国领土（不可分割）的一部分。
9.be famous for;be famous as
这一对短语都是“以……而出（著）名”的意思，但它们会在含义和用法上有区别。
(1)当主语是表示人的名词时，be famous for表示“以某种知识、技能、作品或特征而出名”，be famous as 则表示“以某身份而出名”。试比较：
Einstein was famous for his Theory of Relativity.爱因斯坦以他的相对论而著名。
Einstein was famous as a great scientist.爱因斯坦以一位伟大的科学家而著称。
(2)当主语是地点名词时，be famous for 表示“以某种特点（产品）而出名”；be famous as 则表示“以什么样的产地而出名”。如：
Scotland has many lakes and mountains, and is famous for its beautiful countryside.苏格兰有许多湖泊和山脉，并以其乡村美景著称。
The area is famous as a green tea producing place.这个地区以绿茶产地而出名。
(3)当主语是事物名词时，be famous for表示“以其内容、特征、价值等而被人所知”；be famous as 则表示“以某种形式出名”。如：
This grammar book is famous for its practical usage. 这本语法书以其实用性而被人所知。
This book is famous as a reference book.这是一本有名的参考书。
总之，be famous for后的介词是主语的所属内容，而be famous as 后的介词宾语则与主语是同位成分。
10.feed…to;feed…on(with);feed on
这三个词组都有“喂食”的意思，但使用时须注意区别：
(1)feed…to中的feed是及物动词，其后接饲料或食物名词作宾语，to为介词，其后一般接动物或小孩等名词表示对象，其词组意思是：把……喂给……吃。如：
Please feed some grass to the cow.请给牛喂点草。
She has fed milk to the baby.她已给婴儿喂过奶。
(2)feed…on 中的feed也是及物动词,其后接人或动物名词作宾语, on后接食物或饲料名词,其词组表示“用……喂……”。On可与with 替换。如：
The child was feeding the monkey on/with a banana.那孩子用香蕉喂猴子。
(3)feed on 中的feed为不及物动词，意思是“食、吃”（主要指动物，若指人则为口语或诙谐用语），与介词on连用构成及物动词词组，其词组意思是“以……为食，靠……为生”，其主语主要用来指动物，也可用于指婴儿，其宾语通常是食物或饲料名词。如：
Cattle feed mostly on grass.牛以草为主食。
feed on与live on同义，但live on主要用于指人，以人作主语，常以表示食物、工资、钱等的名词作宾语。如：
People live on rice.这里的人以大米为主食。
She lives on a small salary.她靠微薄的薪水为生。
但live on 也可用于指动物，以动物名词作主语。例如：
All ants live/feed on liquid food.所有的蚂蚁以液体食物为主。
二、考点精析与拓展
题1 （上海 ）
It is not rare in _______ that people in_____fifties are goig to university for further eduation.
A.90s; their B.the 90s ;不填
C.90s; 不填 D.the 90s;their
分析：D。表示“20世纪90年代”应用in the 90s，在某人50多岁的时候应用in one’s fifties。
题2 （NMET 1995）
He gained his ______ by painting______of famous writers.
A.wealth;work B.wealths; works
C.wealths;work D.wealth;works
分析：D。wealth财富，为不可数名词，故不能选择B和C。works表“著作、作品”，可数名词，常用复数。
题3
-I’d like________ information about the management of your hotel,please.
-Well,you could have ______ word with the manager. He might be helpful.
A.some;a B.an;some C.some;some D.an;a
分析：A。information为不可数名词，前不能加不定冠词，所以B，D应排除。have a word with sb.是英语中的固定词组，意为“谈一谈”。
题4 （上海 1993）
His eyes shone brightly when he finally received the magazine he_________.
A.had long been expected B.had long expected
C.has long expected D.was long expected
分析：B。expect的动作发生在receive之前，即过去时态之前，所以用过去完成时态。
题5 （NMET ）
-Is John coming by train?
-He should,but he______ not. He likes driving his car.
A.must B.can C.need D.may
分析：D。 该题考查情态动词用法，根据题意可知：John应该坐火车来，但也许不是（坐火车来）。从四个选项的否定形式看：mustn’t表示“绝对禁止、不允许”，can’t 表示“不可能”，needn’t表示“没必要”，may not 表示“可能不”，所以应用may not.
题6
Which is _____ country, Canada or Australia?
A.a large B.larger C.a larger D.the larger
分析：D。要比较两个中“较……的一个”，应用比较级。所以前面加the.
四、课后巩固训练
Ⅰ、单项填空：
A）从A、B、C、D中找出其划线部分与所给单词划线部分读音相同的选项。
1.comfort A.company B.compet C.connect D.concert
2.role A.rob B.poem C.drop D.done
3.court A.journey B.flour C.pour D.honour
4.trial A.immediate B.dialogue C.official D.special
5.relation A.prefer B.fresh C.judgement D.learned(v)
B）从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳答案。
6. They tried to_______him up as a“national hero”.
A.dress B.do C.make D.all of the three
7. The boss has promised that every player in NBA_______have a rise in income.
A.would B.might C.shall D.can
8. _______for the best,_______for the worse.
A.Hope;prepare B.Wish;ready C.Prepare;hope D.Prepare;wish
9. It is no use_______to argue with him.
A.to manage B.managing C.trying D.to be tried
10. It seems to me that_______knowledge is as_______to me as life itself.
A.precious;dear B.expensive;dear C.valuable;worth D.dear;good
11. Tom was afraid_______.
A.to be scolded B.of being scolded
C.that he is scolded D.that he will scold
12. He pretended_______when his father came in.
A.to read B.to have read C.to be reading D.reading
13. The new building is five times_______the old one.
A.the size B.as bigger as C.as big than D.as big as
14. The girl_______in red over there is my sister.
A.wearing B.dressed C.having on D.putting on
15. -Can he carry the heavy bag alone?
-_______.He is too old to do it.
A.Yes,of course B.Afraid not C.Certainly D.I don’t tnink it
16. -May I use your dictionary for a while?
-_______.
A.Sorry,I’m using it myself B.No,you mustn’t
C.No,you can’t D.Yes,thanks
17. Things are getting from bad to_______.
A.terible B.bad C.better D.worse
18. _______the article a second time,the meaning will become clearer to you.
A.When you read B.While reading C.If reading D.Your having read
19. _______you met with Mr Smith for the first time?
A.When it was thatB.Was it when that
C.When is it thatD.Was it that when
20. The boys_______on the bench took ride_______their families.
A.seated;in B.sitting;of C.seating;in D.set;with
21. I think_______our duty_______our seats to the women_______babies in their arms.
A.it;to offer;taking B.that;to give;carrying
C.it;offering;taking D.that;giving;carryed
22. “He threw himself_______my mercy.”means“He bagged me to_______mercy on him.”
A.at;have B.on;have C.to;show D.on;show
23. I think it not easy to_______judgement on this book correctly.
A.pass B.make C.do D.bring
24. They_______me the house for 80000 dollars.
A.offered B.took C.payed D.spent
25. At first sight they both_______.
A.was in love with each other B.fell in love with each other
C.missed very much D.love each other
Ⅱ、完形填空（共25小题，每小题1分，满分25分）
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从26-50各题所给的四个选项中，选出一个最佳答案。
Late one night,Mr Smith was 26 by a terrible noise in the street outside his house.It sounded 27 a fight was 28 ,and as Mr Smith enjoyed nothing 29 than 30 a fight in the street,he 31 his window and looked out.He saw 32 young men 33 outside his own front door,but,when they saw him 34 them,they went round the 35 of the house and 36 to shout and to beat each other there.
Mr Smith didn’t want to miss anything,so he ran down and opened his front door, but he wrapped himself 37 a blanket 38 he went out.
He walked to the corner of his house and looked 39 it.He saw the two men were 40 shouting and shouting there.Mr Smith went closer to them,both to see the fighting better 41 try to find out what they were 42 .But,as soon as he was within easy reach of the men,they 43 fighting,jumped 44 him and seized his blanket,and fled into the darkness with it.
Mr Smith was too old 45 them,so he could do nothing but 46 sadly back to bed without his blanket.“Well,”said his wife.“ 47 were they fighting?”
“It 48 that they were fighting about my blanket 49 their fight 50 as soon as they got it,”answered Mr Smith.
26.A.awake B.woken up C.woke D.wake
27.A.like B.as C.as if D.because
28.A.happened B.held C.taken place D.going on
29.A.well B.better C.best D.much
30.A.watching B.to watch C.seeing D.to see
31.A.opened B.closed C.locked D.pushed
32.A.a B.two C.three D.the
33.A.was fighting B.fighting C.to fight D.fought
34.A.was watching B.to watch C.watch D.watching
35.A.door B.window C.corner D.wall
36.A.continued B.stopped C.began D.go on
37.A.with B.in C.by D.at
38.A.after B.before C.while D.for
39.A.round B.for C.back D.out of
40.A.already B.yet C.even D.still
41.A.but B.and C.yet D.nor
42.A.fighting B.fighting for C.fighting against D.fighting with
43.A.stopped B.continued C.lasted D.began
44.A.up B.at C.to D.with
45.A.to run with B.to run after C.to run before D.to run behind
46.A.to go B.go C.going D.went
47.A.What B.How C.When D.Why
48.A.seemed B.looked C.appear D.sounded
49.A.because B.since C.as D.for
50.A.went on B.lasted C.ended D.started
Ⅱ、阅读理解。（共25小题，A节每小题2分，B节每小题1分，满分45分）
A）阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从各题所给的四个选项中，选出一个最佳答案。
A
Most of the large cities in the world have grown without plans,among which London is a one.London’s street wind their way and there is no reason or order to its street numbering system,indeed no one but a practiced taxi driver knows the whole of London.And before he gets his license he must first tour the city for months,street by street,then take a test to prove that he can find his way about.
New York and Chicago grow in much the same.They spread out like pouring water expanding in all directions.
51. From this passage we know that London’s streets_______.
A.are wide,long and clean B.are not clean but straight
C.are clean but not straight D.are in good order but not wide
52. New York and Chicago_______.
A.are different from London in every way B.have grown without plan like London
C.have no street numbering system D.are better planned than London
53. A driver can get his license_______.
A.after he has toured the whole city B.after he passes the test
C.before he finds his way aboutD.Both A and B
54. This passage mainly tells us_______.
A.large cities should be well planned
B.all streets in big cities expand in all directions
C.most of the large cities play an important part
D.most of the large cities are not well planned
B
Something interesting happened during the last Christmas shopping hour in London.A poor man,who,though no fault of his own,found himself locked in a big store late on Christmas Eve.No doubt the store was crowded with people buying presents and the assistants were dead beat and wanted to go home.It seemed that all the necessary checks were made before the store was locked,and the assistants went home to enjoy the three-day holiday.
However that may be,the man was still in the store.When he realized that,he decided to make the best of it.In the store,of course,there was plenty of food,drink and bedding.There must have been radios and television sets,which no one could tell whether the man had ever used.When the store reopened,the man was discovered in bed with a large number of empty bottles beside him.He seemed to have been very happy. Everyone else was enjoying Christmas,so he saw no reason why he should not do the same.Happily enough,he let the police take him away.Perhaps he had a better Christmas than usual.It was reported that the man would have to stay in prison for seven days.It seemed,however,the judge was not going to do anything for the store,as he said that the had become better known through the story in the newspapers and on television.
55. The man_______when he found that he was locked in.
A.did not feel worried B.was frightened
C.took pity on himself D.got very angry
56. In the story,dead beat means_______.
A.hungry B.late C.tired out D.lazy
57. In“……The man decided to make the best of it”,it refers to_______.
A.the situation B.the store C.the holiday D.the food
58. The judge did nothing for the store because he thought_______.
A.the store had done all this for the man
B.the man had stolen nothing valuable from the store
C.the man should have a happy Christmas in the store
D.in fact the man bad done something good for the store
C
Would you like to spend your vacation travelling by balloon?The first balloon trip took place in France in 1783.It lasted only eight minutes.About a year later,an American and a French man decided to cross the channel between France and England in a balloon.High over the channel,they discovered a hole in the balloon.It grew bigger and bigger.The gas keeping the balloon up was escaping.The men threw all their belongings into the water to make the balloon lighter.It started to rise higher again,but it was still too close to the water.Finally the men threw away most of their clothes to save themselves.The crowd waiting for them in England was very surprised when the balloon landed!
59. The men threw most of their clothes away_______.
A.to get out of danger
B.because there was a hole in the balloon
C.because the balloon was going up
D.to save their clothes
60. The crowd waiting for them were surprised because_______.
A.the men threw all their belongings into the water
B.the gas was keeping the balloon up was
C.the hole in the balloon was gone
D.the two men had almost nothing on when they landed
61. The two men had their balloon trip in_______.
A.1783 B.1781 C.1784 D.1782
62. Why was it too close to the water when they had thrown all their belongings? _______.
A.Because they wanted to land
B.Because they were too fat
C.Because they wanted to do so
D.Because there was something wrong with the balloon
63. The channel between France and England is called_______.
A.the England ChannelB.the English Channel
C.the British ChannelD.the Great Britain Channel
D
Older American think that people do not seem to enjoy April Fool’s Day as much today as in the past.They say fewer tricks are played on people and sometimes the tricks are not funny at all.Here is a story about it.It happened in Boston several years ago.A TV station broadcast a special report on April about a volcano(火山) sudenly developing near the city.It showed a film of the volcano exploding(爆炸).At the end of the report,the newsman held up a sign which said“April Fool!”But many people never saw the sign.They were already on the telephone trying to call the police to find the best way out of the city.Almost no one thought the joke was funny including the owner of the TV station.He dismissed the man who had made the joke.
64. In the older Americans’ opinion(看法)_______.
A.people today do not enjoy April Fools’ day as much as they used to
B.most people enjoyed April Fools’ Day in the past
C.the tricks played on April Fools’ are not very funny
D.neither in the past nor today people enjoy April Fools’ Day
65. Many people in Boston tried to flee from the city because_______.
A.they didn’t see the sign at the end of the TV report
B.they were eager to ask the police for help
C.they didn’t enjoy the joke on the TV at all
D.the film of the volcano exploding frightened them
66. The example the writer gave shows that_______.
A.the citizens in Boston were too foolish
B.the joke went too far
C.many people in Boston were afraid of death
D.the newsman was good at joking
67. Which of the following is true according to the passage?
A.None of the people in Boston thought the joke was funny
B.Many people would have none of the sign
C.All the people including the owner of the TV station dislike the joke
D.The joke-maker didn’t think the joke went too far
68. The newsman held up the sign in order to_______.
A.make the joke even more funny
B.tell people that it was only a joke
C.advise them to flee the city as quickly as possible
D.ask them to keep calm in time of danger
E
BLANTYE-Malawi’s General(将军) Manken Chigawa was shot dead on Wednesday night when thieves tried to steal his car,police said yesterday.The police said Chigawa ran towards the car after it was stolen when he and several bodyguards stopped at the roadside to buy something in Nichen,160 kilometres south of Capital Lilongwe. Chigawa and one of the thieves were killed in the gunfire,the police said.
China Daily
Friday,April 21,1995
69. Manken Chigawa was killed_______.
A.in the morning B.on Friday night C.on April 19th D.in his car
70. A bodyguard is a person_______.
A.who is a strong-bodied guard
B.whose job is to guard a car
C.who watches a prisoner or a thief,or keeps a building safe
D.whose job is to keep danger away from an important person
B）根据对话内容，从对话后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。
Mr Hunt: Where’s the map?Do you have it?
Mrs Hunt: No,I don’t have it.Sheila has it.But she’s using it to go to Hampstead.71.
Mr Hunt: No,we can’t 72 .
Mrs Hunt: We’re in Bayswater Road now. 73 .
Mr Hunt: Park Lane.
Mrs Hunt: 74 .
Mr Hunt: Yes,Park Lane’s east of Hyde Park.
Mrs Hunt: 75 .
Mr Hunt: Well,Bayswater Boad’s north of Hyde Park.East is that way,to the right.
A.That’s easy.
B.Do you think we can lose our way?
C.Where’s east?
D.We want to go to Park Lane.
E.Shall we go to Park Lane or Park Street?
F.The streets have names and we can ask the way.
G.That’s all right.
Ⅳ、单词拼写（共10小题，每小题1分，满分10分）
76.Good medicine is b_______ to mouth.
77.“Good morning”and“Dear Sir”are g_______.
78.Choose the correct answers a_______ to the passage.
79.Mother took great p_______ of his successful son.
80.The cruel woman showed little m_______ to the little girl.
81.He is a _______(搏学的) lawyer.
82.She is a near _______(亲戚) of mine.
83.Her mother’s loving cares _______(安慰) the sobbing girl.
84.China signed long-term trade _______(协议) with Poland and Hungary in 1958.
85.The young strongly _______(欲望) to do something.
Ⅴ、改错（共10小题，每小题1.5分，满分15分）
Which is best way to learn a language? 86._______
We should remember what we all learnt out 87._______
own language well when we were children. 88._______
If we could learn a second language by the 89._______
same way,it would not seem such difficult. 90._______
Think of what small child does.It listens 91._______
to people to speak and tries to learn. 92._______
It is using a language.It is talking 93._______
in it and thinking in it all the time.If 94._______
people had to using a second language all 95._______
the time,they would learn it quickly.
Ⅵ、书面表达（满分30分）
在火车站里，有人向你打听去St.Johnson School的路。请参照地图说明道路。提示：去St.Johnson School并不难。出车站向左转，走到红绿灯处，由十字路口(crossroads)再向左转，那是St Johns大街。沿街一直走到一家电影院，过了电影院，左边有一条很狭窄(narrow)的街，叫Stamp Street.沿街走二百码便是学校，对面有座教堂。
A.Can you tell me the way to St.Johnson School?
B._________________________________________________.
参考答案
1-10 ABCBA DCACA 11-20 BCDBB ADACA 21-30 AAAAB BCDBA 31-40 ABBDC ABBAD
41-50 BBABB BDAAC 51-60 BBDDA CADAD 61-70 CDBAD BCBCD 71-75 BFEAC
76.bitter 77.greeting 78.according 79.pride 80.mercy 81.learned
82.relation 83.comforted 84.agreement 85.desire
86.best-the best 87.what-how 88.去掉well 89.by-in 90.such-so
91.small-a small 92.speak-to speak 93.a-the 94.√ 95.using-use
A: Can you tell me the way to St.Johnson School?
B: Yes,certainly.It is not very difficult to find your way from the station to St.Johnson School.When you come out of the station,turn left and keep walking until you reach the traffic lights.Turn left at the crossroads again.You will be on Sat. Johns Street.Go straight ahead along the street until you come to the cinema,Just after the cinema there is a very narrow street on the left.This is Stamp Street.The school is about two hundred yards down the street on the right.There is a church opposite.
篇7：高考英语第一轮总复习讲座之十八（SBⅡ-Units 9-10）
一、考点精析与拓展
1.die out 熄灭；绝种；逐渐消失。如：
①The fire died out .火灭了。
②That talkative man’s voice died out.那个健谈的人的声音渐渐地听不见了。
2.the + 形容词（分词）表示一类人的用法。
常见的短语有：
the old(young; rich; poor; learned; living…).如：
The living should carry out what the dead unfinished.
活着的人（后人）应该把前人未竞事业进行到底。
3.no more than①(=noly)仅仅，不过。②两者都不。如：
①What can I do, I’m no more than a citizen.
我能怎么样，我只不过是个平民百姓。
②Tom is no cleverer than Jack.汤姆和杰克都不聪明。
但是：not more than 表示A 不如B（……）或不超过。如；
①My English is not better than yours.
我的英语不如你的好。
②I think you are not more than twenty years old.
我想你不满二十岁吧。
4.关于there be句型：①是一种倒装句式，be后的主语要和be在数上保持一致。如：
There is a pen, two books and some other things on the table.桌上有一支笔，两本书和一些其他的东西。
②there be句型有完成式there have(has)been;有将来式there is
going to(will)be。
③there be句型中可加情态动词。如：
I am sure there used to be a shop near here.我肯定在这附近以前有家商店。
④there be句型中有的be,还可以用其他词表示“有、存在”，there live(一般跟人，有……一个人)，there stand(指物，树、高楼之类)，there lie(物，如一片土地等)。如：
There stand many tall buildings in our school and there lies a large wheat field in front of it.
我们学校里耸立着许多高楼，校门口是一大片麦田。
5.insist表示“坚持要求（某人或主语本身）干某事。”；suggest 表示“建议”，以及order, demand, request, advise…，这些动词后的宾语从句常用虚拟语气形式。
即主语+（should）+动词原形+……，should常可省略。如：
He insisted that he(should)be sent to the poorest place to work。他坚持要求派他去最贫穷的地方工作。
agree with sb.(sth：表意见、看法等的名词)
6. agree to sth.(表示安排、计划之类的词)
agree on sth.(一般表示原双方共同商讨以后达成协议的名词)]
如：I don’t agree with you to this arrangement, but perhaps, after a discussion we will agree on this project.
我不赞同你在这件事的安排，但或许在协商之后我们可以就这个工程达成共识。
7.①be fit for适合于
This job is fit for you.这份工作适合你干。
②主语+be + fit + to do sth.如：
Nobody is fit to take his place.没有合适的人接替他。
③（物，衣物之类）+fit+sb.表示衣帽之类适合某人，合身。
The shirt does not fit me well.这件衬衫不太合我的身。
8.in place/out of place在原处；在合适的位置。
①You should keep everything in place.(=in order)
你应该把所有的东西都放好。
②What you said is somewhat out of place.你的话有些离谱了。
9.lose one’s sight(way; life; work;reason)分别表示：失明；
迷路；牺牲；失业；失去理智等。如：
His son lost his life in the fighting.他儿子在战斗中牺牲了。
10.put sb. to the trouble(of doing sth.)给某人添麻烦，使某人为做某事而为难，trouble是不可数名词。如：
They didn’t want to put me to the trouble of meeting them at the station.他们不想麻烦我去车站接他们。
11.be after追寻；追捕；找……
12.do sb. a favour或do a favour for sb.给某人帮个忙，如果有to do sth.则常用。
do sb.the favour to do sth.如：
①I wonder if you can do me a favour?我不知道你能不能帮我个忙？（没有说干何事）
②Please do me the favour to open the door, I want to go
out.
麻烦你给我开一下门，我要出去。
13.very当形容词用时，意思为“正是，恰好是……”如果有定语从句则常用that 引导。如：This is the very book(that)I’m after.这正是我要找的书。
14.make…to one’s own measure“依照某人的尺寸做……”如：
This coat is made to you own measure,I’m sure it will fit you nicely.这件大衣是你订做的，我想肯定很合身。
to当介词用，“依照、按照”如：
She is dancing to the music.她在随音乐节拍跳舞。
15.depend on(=rely on)依靠；依赖；以……而定；取决于……。如：
①Whether you will succeed or not depends on how hard you
work.你是否成功得看你努力的程度。
②I don’t want to depend on my parents any longer.我不想再依赖父母了。
16. do up 收拾（东西）。整理、梳装打扮、系（扣）好……
①He was so hurried that he did up his buttons wrongly.
他太着急了以致于扣错了纽扣。
②She spent a long time doing up her hair.她花了很长时间把头盘起来。
二、精典名题导解
题1 （NMET 1999）
They not only make it difficult to sleep at night , but they are__________damage to our houses, and shops of historical interest.
A.doing B.raising C.putting D.producing
分析：A。该题考查固定搭配。do damage to对……造成损坏。
题2 （NMET 1994）
The first text books__________ for teaching English as foreign language came out in the 16th century.
A.having written B.to be written
C.being written D.written
分析：D。write 与the first textbooks之间存在被动关系，表结果。
题3 （NMET ）
___________in thought , he almost ran into the car in front of him.
A.Losing B.Having lost C.Lost D.To lose
分析：C。大多数过去分词含有“被动”和“完成”双重意义，有的过去分词只含有“完成”意义，有的则“被动”“完成”意义均没有。be lost in 意为“全神贯注”，它既无“完成”意义，又无“被动”意义，为一个固定词组。
题4 （上海2002）
Don’t use words, expressions, or phrases________only to people with specific knowledge.
A.being known B.having been known
C.to be known D.known
分析：D。本题考查的是过去分词表被动的用法。known相当于that are known .
题5 （NMET 1993）
In some parts of the world, tea________ with milk and sugar.
A.is serving B.is served C.serves D.served
分析：B。serve意为“上菜、开 饭、斟酒”是及物动词。
题6 （上海 2002）
-You forgot your purse when you went out.
-Good heavens,__________.
A.so did I B.so I did C.I did so D.I so did
分析：B。so sb.do(does),表示“确实那样做了”之意。而so do sb.表示“某人也那样做了”之意。
四、课后巩固训练
第I 卷 （三部分，共115分）
第一部分：听力（共两节，满分30分）
第一节（共5小题，每小题1.5分，满分7.5分）
听下面5段对话，每段对话后有一个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，并标在试卷的相应位置。每段对话仅读一遍。
1. What does the woman do?
A. An editor B. A nurse C. A housewife
2. What does the man want to use a bag to carry?
A. Disks B. Tapes C. Books
3. What do they want to find?
A. The orders for some men’s clothes B. The men’s clothing department
C. Miss Emerson
4. Where can the man buy cassettes?
A. In the music department on the third floor. B. In the music section on the fourth floor
C. In the music department on the second floor
5. Where was the woman born?
A. In Australia B. In the United States C. In Britain
第二节 （共15小题，每小题1.5分，满分22.5分）
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，并标在试卷的相应位置。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料，回答第6至第8题。
6. How soon will they get to the hotel?
A. In an hour B. In half an hour C. In one third of an hour
7. Who will come to visit the city soon?
A. The visitor’s wife B. The visitor and his wife C. The visitor’s whole family
8. What are dotted in the distance?
A. They are houses of the hotel B. They are peasants’ houses C. They are their houses
听第7段材料，回答第9至第11题。
9. What will they put on a show for?
A. For fun B. For money C. For nothing
10. What can we conclude from their dialogue?
A. They want to put on three shows in all B. Three people will appear in the play
C. They will sing three songs in the play.
11. What can we learn about the man?
A. He often gets up on a stage B. He sings popular songs for money.
C. He will sing and dance in the show
听第8段材料，回答第12至第14题。
12. Where does the library stand?
A. Behind the No. 15 Building. B. Behind the student Union Building
C. On the left side of the red brick building
13. Where does this dialogue most probably take place?
A. In front of the Student Union Building B. At the street corner
C. In the school ground
14. Where can the man see the instruction?
A. In the main entrance of the library. B. In the Student Union Building
C. In the red brick building
听第9段材料，回答第15至第17题。
15. What did the man go to Guangzhou for?
A. To see bikes B. To visit his uncle C. To take buses and cars
16. How does the woman find riding bicycles?
A. Interesting and exciting B. Quite different from driving a car. C. Good for people’s health.
17. Which city is noisier according to the woman?
A. Guangzhou B. Hong Kong C. New York
听第10段材料，回答第18至第20题。
18. Why does the writer want to move away?
A. The area she lives in is too crowded and noisy. B. Her neighbors are too noisy at night
C. Her house is not big and new enough
19. How long has she been looking for a new flat?
A. For seven years B. For more than a year. C. For several months.
20. What does she think of the last flat the agent recommends(介绍) to her?
A. It is peaceful and quiet, just right for her. B. She is not pleased with it at all.
C. It is still too noisy with a busy road on one side.
第二部分： 英语知识运用 （共两节，满分45分）
第一节：单项填空 （共15小题，每小题1分，满分15分）
从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项，并在答题卡上将该项涂黑。
21. -----Are you going for a walk with us?
----_______, if Mary goes.
A. So do I B. So am I C. So I do D. So I am
22. All the peace-loving people are against American’s bombing Iraq. They think Bush
is lifting a stone _____ it _____ on his own feet.
A. only to have; dropping B. to have; dropped
C. only to have; dropped D. having; dropped
23. _____ the people have become masters of their country _____ science can really serve
the people.
A. It is only then; that B. It was that; when C. It is only when; that
D. It was when; then
24. Coal is hard, like a rock and yet it burns , while no rocks ________.
A. do B. does C. are D. is
25. ----Do you have an extra ticket for the concert? ----Yes.
----Well, who would you rather ____with you, George or me?
A. have to go B. have gone C. to have gone D. have go
26. No matter how frequently ____, the works of Lao She always attract a large audience.
A. performed B. performing C. to perform D. to be performed
27. ----Those shoes won’t ____for mountain-climbing.
----__________this pair be OK?
A. help; Shall B. work; May C. do; Will D. get; Would
28. As the saying ____, America is a country on wheels. For example, there are 90 cars
________ every 100 people in Los Angeles.
A. says; in B. reads; with C. goes; for D. is said ; out of
29. ______, this new kind of disease called SARS can cause great horror in the heart of the
people there.
A. Occurring where B. It occurs where it is
C. where it occurs D. The place where it occurs
30. The house rent is expensive. I’ve got about half the space I had at home and I’m paying
________here.
A. as much three times B. much as three times C. three times much
D. three times as much
31. ----Did you find out the time of train to Miami?
----Yes, the early train is ____to leave at 5:30 a.m.
A. due B. likely C. possible D. about
32. All the leading newspapers ____ the news that ____66-year-old Saddam Hussein
was finally caught.
A. reported; a B. made; the C. covered; the D. printed; /
33. Not far from the club there was a garden, _____ owner seated in it playing bridge
with his children this time every afternoon.
A. whose B. which C. that D. its
34. It’s widely known that first aid is ______important and you can save lives if the right
action is taken.
A. terribly B. hardly C. scarcely D. rarely
35. ----Hi, Randall, come on in.
----Oh, yeah, I _____by to see if you _____for a roommate to share your house.
A. stopped; were still looking B. will stop; are still looking
C. have stopped; were still looking D. stop; will have looked
第二节 完型填空 （共20小题，每小题1.5分，满分30分）
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从36-55各小题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项，并在答题卡上将该项涂黑。
Competition is necessary for the development and advancement of a society. Cooperation(合作) is important for the existence and _____(36) of a society. Competition can ____(37) one to make greater progress, ____(38) cooperation can bring benefits to society as well as to everyone. In my opinion, _____(39) competition and sincere friendly cooperation should be _____(40) and promoted.
Competition_____(41)be seen everywhere and every time. It can be very ____(42). For example, the workers of one factory try their best to produce high quality products in order to compete with other factories to make a larger ____(43) in the market. College students compete with each other, to get better _____(44), win scholarship(奖学金)，and then get better jobs in the _____(45). This is just like a _____(46) in the sports meeting. Only when we dash along can we ____(47). On the other hand, we live, work and study with many other people and we are ____(48) of a society. In many cases, we can’t do _____(49) cooperation between us because each one’s ability is ____(50). _____(51), cooperation is also important. As ____(52) as we are cooperative, our achievements will be greater. We can say that cooperation is the _____(53) of success.
In one word, if one wants to be successful, to gain greater achievements and to ______(54) for a happier and safer life, he or she must ______(55) to be competitive and cooperative.
36. A. value
37. A. pull
38. A. or
39. A. fair
40. A. encouraged
41. A. must
42. A. steady
43. A. sale
44. A. grades
45. A. college
46. A. game
47. A. arrive
48. A. members
49. A. without
50. A. broad
51. A. However
52. A. soon
53. A. key
54. A. seek
55. A. learn
第三部分：阅读理解 （共20小题，每小题2分，满分40分）
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出一个最佳选项，并在答题卡上将该项涂黑。
(A)
Improve the world around you
You may think that inventions are far away from your everyday life. But in fact, almost everyone can invent. It's just that they do not recognize that their idea could be the start of an invention.
Once inventors see their ideas have some practical value, they don't let them slip away.
For example, the inventor of the dishwasher, American Josephine Cochrane, loved to give dinner parties. But she found it took too long to wash her dishes by hand and too many of them broke. She decided that a machine could do the job faster and with fewer mistakes. So, in 1886, she set out to make one for herself.
Like Cochrane's, most inventions are created to solve a problem. So, the first and most important step is to find the problem.
You can start by looking at what is wrong with things you use now. You can ask grandparents or neighbours if they remember ever saying: “I wish someone would invent something for...” Or you can look at people in different areas such as on the street, or at school. Then you might notice situations or things in need of improvement.
Remember to record your ideas and work. This will help you develop your invention and protect it when it is completed.
The next step is to think about possible solutions. An invention is a new way of solving a problem. So think of many, varied, and unusual ways.
You can often come up with a solution for a problem by looking at it from a different angle (角度) or thinking about it in a new way.
Example 1 - instead of thinking of shoes as protecting your feet from the ground, think of using something to protect the ground from your feet.
Example 2 - instead of thinking about how you can carry oranges home from a store, think of how they can come to you by delivery or growing your own.
Example 3 - instead of experimenting with only one solution, can you put two or three solutions together, or arrange them in different orders?
And if one solution doesn't work, can it be put to other uses? That was how yellow post-it notes (N次贴) came about - a “failed” adhesive (粘合剂) experiment proved a weak adhesive had good uses too!
After all, most inventions are not brand new. They do not come out of nowhere, but come out of things or ideas that already exist (存在). And the hardest part of inventing, even for a lot of inventors, is coming up with a problem and finding a solution. Once you have an idea, you can always get help building your invention.
This problem-solving technique can also work in your everyday lives. So, why not try it in your studies, in your relationship with others, or even in the way you look at the world?
56 The main idea of this story is ________.
A. how to improve the world around you
B. that you can invent and how you will be able to do so
C. problem-solving technique
D. how inventors invent
57.What makes inventors different from other people is probably that __________.
A. they consider every new idea as an invention
B. they are full of creative ideas
C. they enjoy solving problems
D. they look for problems and try to solve them in a new and better way
58.What made Josephine Cochrane decide to invent the dishwasher?
A. Her love of parties.
B. Her dislike of dishwashing.
C. Her desire for something that could do the dishwashing better.
D. Her love of inventing.
59.Which of the following is one of the ways to find a problem?
A. Look at the world from a different angle.
B. Find out things that people are not satisfied with.
C. Do experiments.
D. Never let a practical idea slip away.
60.The underlined phrase “come about” probably means to _______.
A. come into being B. put to use C. work D. become
(B)
1. CHINA
Coal mines claim more lives
A COAL mine blast(爆炸) in Jixi, Heilongjiang, left more than 100 miners dead on Thursday. Ten mines in Jixi were ordered to stop production. The government has tried to shut down thousands of small, illegal(非法的) mines in the country that do not meet safety standards.
2.MEDDLE EAST
Bombers continue to kill
PALESTINIANS killed 32 Israelis in three major attacks between Tuesday and Thursday. There were two suicide bombings(自杀性爆炸) and a militant(武装的) attack on a Jewish settlement (犹太人定居点). They yielded one of the highest Israeli death tolls(死亡人数) in such a short period over the last two years.
3.CHINA
Young people stand tall
THE average height of Chinese young people has risen by 6 centimeters compared to that of 20 years ago. This far exceeds(超过) the world’s average growth speed. A survey on health conducted by a panel(调查组) of Chinese students found the results. According to the world average level, youths get taller by 1 cm every 10 years.
4.CANADA
Talking about world issues
THE Group of Eight(G8)----the US, Japan, Germany, Britain, France, Italy, Canada and Russia----will hold a summit(峰会)on June 26 and 27 in Kananaskis, Canada. The G8 are the richest and most powerful countries in the world. G8 leaders and some African presidents will discuss strengthening global economic growth and helping Africa. Kofi Annan, United Nations Secretary-General, will also attend.
61.Thousands of mines have been shut because______.
A. they have blast B. they produced less coal
C. they are very small D. they don’t meet the safety standards
62.How many Israelis died in the three major attacks by Palestinians?
A. 23 B. 32 C. 100 D. we don’t know
63.In the last 20 years, the average growth speed of Chinese youths exceeds the world’s average level by ______.
A. 1 cm B. 4 cm C. 5 cm D. 6 cm
64.What’s the purpose of the Summit?
A. To strengthen the global economic growth and help some poor African countries.
B. To make these eight countries much more powerful
C. To help some African presidents to strengthen their economic growth
D. Kofi Annan will have an important speech on world issues
(C)
Hu Bin spent a whole night surfing the Net at the Ah Hong Internet Café in Beijing.
A Senior Three student at the Middle School attached to Beijing Institute of Chemical
Technology(北京化工学院附中)，Hu said he hadn’t told his parents or teachers.
The café is small, crowded and dirty. There is only a narrow door by which visitors can enter or leave. There are few windows. At night, the door is locked and the air in the café is full of smoke from people’ cigarettes.
The café has now been closed temporarily after a fire at Beijing’s unlicenced (无照的) Lanjisu Internet Café on June 16. The fire killed 25 people----most of whom were students---and injured 13.
Lanjisu Café is one of the 2,400 Internet cafes in Beijing. It is reported that 2,200 of them operate illegally(非法的)。
Two teenage suspects(嫌疑人) have been arrested (逮捕) for starting the fire, local police said on Wednesday.
It is believed that the boys had argued with employees at the café and then set fire to it to get revenge.
The suspects are 13-to-14-year-old middle school students. Both were frequent school truants(逃学者) and Internet café visitors.
The fire started early in the morning. The people inside were trapped behind a locked door and barred windows as thick smoke filled the 24-hour café.
Following the fire, officials ordered all Internet cafes in Beijing to close for safety inspections.
65.Who is believed to have caused the fire at the Lanjisu Internet Café?
A. Hu Bin B. Lanjisu C. Two teenage boys D. Not mentioned in the article
66.From the article we know only _____ Internet cafes operate legally in Beijing.
A. 2,200 B. 200 C. 2,400 D. 400
67.The underlined words “get revenge” means “____________.”
A. 逃跑 B. 报复 C. 通知 D. 犯罪
(D)
Foot and mouth disease(口蹄疫) spread is a fast-spreading disease that can kill cloven-hoofed (叉蹄的) animals like pigs, cows, sheep and goats. Now it has begun its killing on the whole British countryside, forcing the closure(关闭) of almost everything---from country visits to sports events, with Scotland, Northern Ireland and Ireland all preparing for the worst.
The disease causes blisters(水疱)in the mouth and on the feet of the animals. And the virus (病毒)can travel 150 miles or more in a damp breeze(微风)over water, or 40 miles over land through the air. Although the disease does not affect humans, it can be carried on boots and clothing, and can also be spread through the air or through food.
The British government bans all exports of live animals, meat and dairy products. People are advised to keep away from farmland.
In Ireland, the deadly foot-and-mouth disease casts its shadow on Ireland’s most-loved festival: St. Patrick’s Day. The four-day celebration on March 17 had been called off.
And in Scotland, the world’s most famous sheep, the world’s first cloned mammal(哺乳动物), has been quarantined (隔离检疫) as scientists try to find out whether Dolly has contracted(染上) the deadly disease.
68.It seems now that _______.
A. all the animals are easy to be infected (感染) with foot-and-mouth disease.
B. foot-and-mouth disease started in England
C. Asians needn’t worry about the spread of foot-and-mouth disease
D. foot-and-mouth disease has affected humans.
69.Which is the proper way to prevent the disease from spreading?
A. Bury the sick animals in the fields.
B. Kill the sick animals and dry the meat for sale
C. Throw the sick animals into the sea.
D. Burn up the animals with the virus.
70.As soon as the deadly disease was discovered, England __________.
A. started to treat the sick animals B. began to wipe out the disease
C. stopped keeping pigs and cattle D. refused to import foods
71.Because of the disease, in Great Britain _____.
A. many people call at the farms B. lots of workers will be out of work
C. many people will live in hospital D. people have to go to sports
72.According to the article we can infer that _____.
A. the disease has caused a great loss
B. all the animals on the farms in Ireland are ill
C. the cloned sheep seem to be in danger
D. the disease won’t get to the rest places of the world
(E)
Gods and kings
After the great Pyramids and the large Sphinx (狮身人面像), the temple of Abu Simbel presents the most familiar image of ancient Egypt to the modern travelers.
Abu Simbel lies on the western bank of the Nile. The rock-cut temple took nearly 30 years to build. It is the greatest monument built by King Ramses II (1279-1224 BC), who is thought to have had over 100 children.
At the tall entrance of the temple, sit four statues (雕像) of Ramses. Each statue stands about 20 metres high.
Experts say that the first Ramses on the left has “the most expressive, youthful face, looking more like a Grecian (希腊的) model of beauty than that of any ancient Egyptian figure.”
Unfortunately, an ancient earthquake damaged the statues. And one is now destroyed from the waist up.
Inside the temple is actually inside the cliff (悬崖). It exists as a man-made cave cut into the rock. And many halls and rooms extend 56 metres back from the entrance.
The most wonderful part of the site is the exact position of the temple. Twice every year in February and October, the first rays of the morning sun shine through the caves to light up the back wall of the innermost room where there sits four statues of gods.
73. What is the main idea of this story?
A. Gods and kings in the temple. B. The important value of the temple.
C. What’s so special about the temple. D. The history of the temple.
74. More than 60 metres back from the entrance, you can probably find _____.
A. the Sphinx B. a cliff
C. statues of Ramses D. statues of gods
75. Which of the following is not true?
A. The temple has great value in the fields of architecture (建筑学) and sculpture (雕塑学).
B. The temple can be compared to the great Pyramids in a way.
C. The statues of Ramses show the deep relations between the Greeks and the Egyptians.
D. The temple has been damaged.
第II卷 （共35分）
第四部分： 写作 （共两节，满分35分）
第一节：短文改错 （共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分）
此题要求改正所给短文中的错误。对标有题号的每一行作出判断：如无错误，在该行右边横线上划一个勾；如有错误（每一行只有一个错误），则按下列情况改正：
该行多一个词：把多余的词用斜线（/）划掉，在该行右边横线上写出该词，并也用斜线划掉。
该行缺一个词：在缺词处加一个漏字符号（∧）， 在该行右边横线上写出该加的词。
该行错一个词：在错的词下划一横线， 在该行右边横线上写出改正后的词。
注意：原行没有错的不要改。
A foreign university exhibition fair held at Zhijiang
Hotel on March 18. Over 50 universities from 10 countries
open their doors to students who eager to go abroad to
continuing their further study. More and more middle school
students have joined in the tide of going abroad. The
lower-aged group have become the new highlight of this tide.
And whether early entry into international education means
better education nor it pushes the young to leave their family
too early to discipline himself is discussed a lot by both
parents and educators. How do you think of this tide of
going abroad?
第二节：书面表达（满分25分）
假设5月18日是星期天，你带外国朋友在本市游览，请根据图中游览顺序写一则英文日记。
注意：日记必须包括图中所有内容，可以适当增加细节和感想，使日记连贯完整。日记的开头已为你写好，不记入总字数。词数：100左右。
参考词汇：海鲜酒家 The Seafood Restaurant
黑龙江省西北部地区重点中学联谊会
第二次模拟考试答题卡
短文改错：
A foreign university exhibition fair held at Zhijiang
Hotel on March 18. Over 50 universities from 10 countries
open their doors to students who eager to go abroad to
continuing their further study. More and more middle school
students have joined in the tide of going abroad. The
lower-aged group have become the new highlight of this tide.
And whether early entry into international education means
better education nor it pushes the young to leave their family
too early to discipline himself is discussed a lot by both
parents and educators. How do you think of this tide of
going abroad?
书面表达：
Sunday, May 18
Fine
Today I showed some foreign friends around our city.._________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
听力录音材料：
(Test 1 )
M: The work is rather hard, but it’s interesting.
W: Mine isn’t hard, but it is not so interesting.
M: What do you do?
W: I work in a publishing house.
(Test 2)
M: Excuse me, can I borrow your bag?
W: This bag? I have a lot of disks and tapes in it. Can I give you a basket instead?
M: Oh, no. I want to use it to carry all these books.
(Test 3)
M: Miss Emerson, please look again for those orders from the men’s clothing department. We must find
them.
W: They’re not with the other orders, sir. They ought to be there, but they’re not.
M: I don’t care where they ought to be .Look everywhere. We simply have to find them.
W: Yes, sir.
(Test 4)
W: What can I do for you, sir?
M: Do you sell cassettes?
W: Yes. They are in the music section on the third floor.
M: Thank you.
(Test 5)
M: Hi, I don’t think we have met. My name is Tom.
W: Hi, Tom. Nice to meet you. My name is Bonny.
M: Nice to meet you, Bonny. So, where are you from?
W: Well, I am originally from Australia, but we moved to the United States when I was about five years
old.
(Test 6)
W: Get on, please. We are driving to the hotel.
M: How far is it to the hotel?
W: About a twenty-minute ride.
M: In which hotel will I stay?
W: We’ve booked one flat for you and your wife at the Great Wall Hotel, because she will come to visit our
city next week.
M: Yes, she will come here only for sightseeing.
W: The Great Wall Hotel, which is downtown, is one of the best hotels in our city.
M: That’s great! Thank you.
W: You might as well take a brief look as you pass the city center along the way.
M: Look, so many newly-built houses are dotted over there. They all look brand-new.
W: They are the farmers’ houses.
M: How splendid!
(Test 7)
W: We are thinking about putting on a show this spring.
M: Do you think you will be able to make some money?
W: Oh, no, we just want to do it for the fun of it. You know there are a lot of us who like to get up on a stage and perform.
M: What kind of show?
W: A musical.
M: Have you decided which ones to do?
W: We have three in mind, and of course we’ve been thinking about you.
M: Me, why me?
W: You sings, don’t you? Everyone says you have a wonderful voice.
M: Well, I have sung a little, but I’ve never really appeared on a stage.
W: I thought you sang in church every Sunday.
M: That’s different. There are so many others singing, too.
W: Then there is your chance to find out how good you are. And not just to sing but to act and dance too.
M: It might be exciting.
(Test 8)
M: Excuse me. Will you please tell me where I can find the library?
W: Yes. It is in the No. 15 Building.
M: I’m afraid you’ll have to tell me where that is, too. I’m new to this university.
W: Do you mind telling me where you are from?
M: Certainly not. I’m from the USA. My home is in New York.
W: Well, do you see that red brick building just past this building on you left?
M: Yes.
W: Well, that’s the Student Union Building. The library is just behind it. You had better read the
instructions first so that you can borrow the books you like as quickly as possible. As you go in
the main entrance, you’ll see the instructions.
M: Thank you very much. You’ve been very helpful.
W: And so have you. I’m glad to have found another student from America, good luck to you.
(Test 9)
W: Have you ever been to China?
M: Only once I went to see my uncle who lives in Guangzhou. I found it very interesting and so different
from Hong Kong.
W: I was told there aren’t many cars.
M: No. Nearly everyone rides a bicycle. There are more cars in Guangzhou than in most other Chinese
cities, but it still far fewer than here.
W: Riding a bicycle must keep people healthy.
M: I suppose it does. It’s certainly better exercise than sitting in a car or a bus.
W: They must have buses in Guangzhou too, don’t they?
M: Of course they do. It’s very noisy in the rush hour when people are coming and going from work.
The ringing of bicycle bells and the buses blowing their horns make a terrible noise.
W: It can’t be much noiser than in Hong Kong!
(Test 10)
I moved to this area seven years ago. Ever since I moved into this flat, I”ve had trouble falling asleep
at night because my neighbors are too noisy. I have had enough of this and decided to move away. I have
been looking for a new flat since the beginning of this year. Every week I go to the house agent’s office, but
it is the same story. The man always says that he may have something by the end of the week. I have seen
a few flats during my search but I don’t like any of them. One flat I saw had been empty for two years and
it had a busy road on one side and a railway on the other! Last week I went there again. This time I was
told I could get a really quiet flat and that I wouldn’t have any noisy neighbors. I went to see it at once. I
was frightened because it was next to a cemetery. Just imagine what a terrible thing it is to have dead
people as neighbors.
参考答案
1：听力
1---5 ACAAA 6---10 CABAB 11---15 CBCAB 16---20 CBBCB
2：单选
21---25 BCCAD 26---30 ACCCD 31---35 ACDAA
3：完型
36---40 BCBAA 41---45 DDCAB 46---50 DBAAC 51---55 CBBAA
4：阅读
56---60 BDCBA 61---65 DBBAC 66---70 BBBDB 71---75 BACDC
5：改错
76. fair后加was 77. 正确 78. who后加are 79. continuingcontinue 80. in去掉
81. havehas 82. AndBut 83. noror 84. himselfthemselves 85. HowWhat
6：书面表达
One Possible Version
Today I showed some foreign friends around our city. We started off by car from the Friendship Hotel at 8:10 am. We first went to Zhongshan Park. We were all struck by its beautiful flowers on show. Then, we visited the city museum. We saw plenty of valuable things, from which we learned more about the city. After that we drove to Jinshan Temple. It is a beautiful place of interest in our city, and from there we enjoyed the wonderful scenery of the sea. We had a delicious lunch at the Seafood Restaurant and came back at 1:20 pm. All the foreign friends were pleased with my arrangement. We did have a wonderful time today.
篇8：高考英语第一轮总复习讲座之二十（SBⅡ-Units 13-14）
一、单元考点提示
1.单词
A advance, bend, besides, except, content, continue, invite, marry, prove, puzzle, receive, accept, respect, support, when, while
B connect, dozen, mention, personally, question
2.短语
A as a result of, ask for, be fond of, by the time, go on with, how much, lead to, learn…by heart, stick to, work out.
B as far as, carry out, in space, look into, not only…but also, with the help of, with+object+prepositional phrase
3.句型
1.“主语+谓语动词+it+宾语补足语（名词或形容词）+不定式短语”
2. see sb. doing sth.看见某人做某事
3. It + appears/seems + that – clause.
4. I feel like doing sth.
5. I’d like to do sth.
6.I want/intend/wish/plan to do sth
7.It is+adj.+(for sb.)to do sth.
考点精析与拓展
I．单词和词组
1.stick
(1)vt.;vi.粘住；离不开；坚持
Einstein stuck to his theories and went on with his work.爱因斯坦坚持他的理论并继续工作下去。
（2）n.枝条；棍，手杖。
Professor Zhang walks with a stick.张教授拄着手杖走路。
2．prove vt.;vi.证明；结果是；证明是。
①Again history proved them wrong.历史再次证明他们错了。
②I can prove that he never tells a lie.我能证明他从不说谎。
③The method proved(to be)highly effective.这个方法证明是非常有效的。
3.content
(1)n.内容；目录
He always reads the contents of a book first of all.他读书总是先从目录看起。
（2）adj.满足的；甘心的
Are you content with your work?你对你的工作满意吗？
（3）vt.使（某人）满足。
The little boy contented himself with a new toy.那男孩有了新玩具就满足了。
4.respect
（1）vt.尊重；重视；遵守。
①You should respect the teachers.你们应尊敬老师。
②Everyone must respect the law.人人都应守法
（2）n.尊敬；请安；问候。
①We have been told to show respect for our elder.父母教导我们必须尊敬长辈。
②My father sends his respects to your parents.我父亲向你父母问好。
5.lend to 引导；导致。
①Labour leads to happiness.劳动使人幸福。
②Where does this road lead to?这条路通向哪里？
③His carelessness led to his failre.他的粗心导致失败。
6.be full of…→be filled with…充满…
①The classroom was full of students.教室里挤满了学生。
②Her eyes were full of tears.她眼泪汪汪的。
7.work out算出；解决。
①Can you work out how much money it will need?你能算出需多少钱吗？
②I’ve worked out the problem.我已解决了这个问题。
8.take sides(in)袒护；站在……一边。
①They took the side of their child.他们袒护自己的孩子。
②She has taken sides in the quarrel.她参与了争吵。
9.question
(1)n.问题。
①Let me ask you a question.让我问你个问题。
②He has decided tha question.他解决了这个问题。
(2)vt.质问；询问。
①He was questioned by the teacher.他受到老师的质问。
②I question the truth of the story.我怀疑这个故事的真实性。
10.connect vt.; vi.连接；联系。
①He connected the two speakers to (with)the recorder.他把两个喇叭同录音机相连。
②Many people connect China with the Great Wall.许多人把中国与长城联系在一起。
11. attempt
(1)n.尝试；企图。
①He made an attempt to learn to ski.他尝试着学滑雪。
②He failed in attempt at climbing up the mountain.他企图爬上这座山，却失败了。
(2)vt.尝试；企图。
①She attempted to learn Japanese.她试图学习日语。
②The prisoner attempted an escape.那犯人企图逃走。
12.keep out of = keep sth.(sb.)out of不使入内；不牵涉进去。
①Warm clothing will keep the cold out.保暖的衣服可御寒。
②Keep out of their quarrels.不要参与他们争吵。
13.tell A from B →tell difference between A and B.
①Can you tell the difference between the two words?你能辨别这两个单词间的不同吗？
②It’s hard to tell one twin from the other.双胞胎很难分辨。
14.dozens of几十；许多。
①She bought dozens of dresses.她买了许多衣服。
②I’ve borrowed dozens of books for my daughter.我为女儿借了许多书。
II.句型
1.Einstein lived the rest of his life quietly in the USA.爱因斯坦在美国安静地度过了他的余生。
live…life过着……生活
live a hard life过着艰苦的生活
live a happy life 过着愉快的生活
live a quiet life过着安静的生活
live a miserable life过着悲惨的生活
The working people are living a happy life now.劳动人民过着幸福的生活。
2.As a result, it appered to scientists on earth that the stars had moved.因此，地球上的科学家看来，恒星好像是移动了。
句型：It appears/seems(to sb.) +that-clause.看来/似乎是……
①It appears to me that something is wrong.我看好像有点不大对头。
②It appears that he will the prize.看来他会得笑。
3.Einstein.who was a Jew, found it impossible to continue living in Germany.
爱因斯坦是一个犹太人，他发现他不可能在德国继续生活下去了。
句型：主语+动词+it+形容词或名词+不定式短语
此句型中，it 作形式宾语，常用于句型中的动词有find,feel, think, consider, make等。
①I found it quite pleasant to work with him.我发现和他一起工作很愉快。
②He feels it his duty to help others.他感到帮助别人是他的责任。
4.I feel like going to a museum.我想去博物馆。
feel like…想（做某事）；愿意。
I feel like a drink. Have you got any beer?我想喝点东西，你俩有啤酒吗？
5.First, it must be very light, the lighter,…首先，它必须很轻，越轻越好，……
句型：the + 形容词或副词比较级，the + 形容词或副词比较级（越……，就越……）
①The more, the better.越多越好。
②The more they talked, the more encouraged they felt.他们越说，就越感到鼓舞。
③The more he thought about it, the less he liked.他对这个考虑越多，就越不喜欢。
6.The problem with looking into space from the earth is that there is a lot of dust in the earth air.从地球上观察太空存在一个问题，这就是地球的大气中有着大量的尘埃。
with在句中的含意：就……来说。
①With many of the poor, hunger is a constant problem.食不果腹是许多穷人经常存在的问题。
②The problem with these men was that they had no knowledge.这些人的主要问题是他们没有知识。
三、精典名题导解
题1 （MET 1992）
It worried her a bit _________her hair was turning grey.
A.while B. if C.that D.for
分析：C。该题考查主语从句的连接词，句中it指主语从句，因意义完整，所以只需要起连接作用的连接词that.
题2 （NMET 1996）
_________we can’t get seems better than________ we have.
A.What; what B.What; that
C.That; that D.That; what
分析：A。get和have之后都无宾语，故都应填what。
题3 （NMET 1996）
___________we’ll go camping tomorrow depends on the weather.
A.If B.Whether C.That D.Where
分析：B。主语从句表示的是不肯定的意义，故不能选择C。从意义上看，D不合句意，又因whether能引导主语从句，而if不能。
题4 （上海 ）
-Will yo go skiing with me this winter vacation?
-It __________.
A.all depend B.all depends
C.is all depended D.is all depending
分析：B。本题是固定用法。It all depends.“看情况而定”。
题5 （高考改错题）
Who can walk in the space?
分析：去掉the. space 作“空间，太空”讲，不与the 连用。space表示具体的空白处、空地等时（即有修饰语修饰space时），它应与冠词连用。
题6 （上海 2002）
One may to understand thousands of new words is to gain _________ good knowledge of basic word formation.
A./ B.the C.a D.one
分析：C。知识为不可数名词，但当在knowledge前加上修饰语时，需用“a”。
四、课后巩固训练
第一卷（三部分，共115分）
第一部分：听力（共两节，满分30分）
第一节（共5小题；每小题1.5分，满分7.5分）
1. How much did each dinner cost?
A. $16. B. $8. C. $32.
2. What does the woman want to know?
A. Where Sally lost her money last week.
B. What Sally had done to break her arm.
C. How Sally was feeling.
3. Which dress did the woman wear?
A. The prettier one.
B. The new one.
C. The more comfortable one.
4. Who is the woman?
A. Ann Robinson’s sister.
B. Ann Robinson’s sister.
C. Ann Robinson’s friend.
5. What will happen if the man does shopping?
A. The woman will cook.
B. He will dine out.
C. He will have to buy some food for the dinner.
第二节（共15小题；每小题1.5分，满分22.5分）
听第6段材料，回答第6-7题。
6. What are they talking about?
A. Where to spend their holiday.
B. How to drive a tractor.
C. Their summer vacation.
7. Where did Jane spend her summer holiday?
A. On a farm. B. At home. C. In a fruit garden.
听第7段材料，回答第8-11题。
8. Where did the man go this morning?
A. His own garden. B. A playground. C. The Summer Palace.
9. Did the man often go there early in the morning in the past?
A. No, this is the first time for him.
B. Yes, often.
C. No, only several times.
10. Who did the man see sitting under a tree?
A. Two old women. B. Two old men. C. Two young girls.
11. What kind of sports is Taijiquan?
A. Proper sports. B. General sports. C. National sports.
听第8段材料，回答第12-14题。
12. Where is the man calling?
A. A train station. B. A park. C. A theatre.
13. What are the prices of the tickets he wants?
A. $3.50. B. $5. C. $7.50
14. What time does he have to collect the tickets?
A. Before 7:50 B. Before 7:45 C. Before 7:15
听第9段材料，回答第15-17题。
15. What is the man doing?
A. He is painting a picture.
B. He is painting the house.
C. He is painting the fence.
16. What is the woman going to help the man with?
A. She is going to clean the house.
B. She is going to buy a carpet.
C. She is going to make some curtains.
17. Why does the man say sorry to the woman?
A. Because he made a mess in the house.
B. Because he dropped some paint on the carpet.
C. Because he used a colour that woman doesn’t like.
听第10段材料，回答第18-20题。
18. What did the man do at about 4 o’clock?
A. He drove to have supper with his daughter.
B. He drove to fetch his daughter.
C. He drove back home with his daughter.
19. What did the man stop off at a shop for?
A. To get something for his car.
B. To get some gas.
C. To buy some fruit and bread.
20. What happened according to what you hear?
A. His car fell off the bridge.
B. An earthquake happened.
C. There was something wrong with his car.
第二部分：英语知识运用（共两节，满分45分）
第一节 单项填空（共15小题；每小题1分，满分15分）
21. -When will your group go for the spring journey, next week or the week after?
-____
A. Yes, we will. B. At the end of the year, I think
C. That depends. D. It’s my pleasure.
22. -Why not join us in the game?
-_____
A. Oh, that’s all right. B. Sure, please do.
C. No, you do the same. D. Ok, coming.
23. -I can’t find my umbrella.
-You _____ it on the bus.
A. must forget B. must leave
C. must have forgot D. must have left
24. That was the day, I think _____ I’ll never forget in my life.
A. the one B. when C. on which D. in which
25. If you don’t _____ him and his advice seriously, you may feel regret for this some day.
A. keep B. take C. accept D. receive
26. -Why do you drink so much tea?
-Well, _____it doesn’t keep me awake in the nights.
A. although B. as soon as C. as long as D. while
27. With _____ she needed _____, she left the store.
A. something, to buy B. anything, having bought
C. everything, to buy D. everything bought
28. I can _____ some noise while I am reading, but I can’t stand loud noise.
A. put up with B. keep up with C. get along with D. catch up with
29. I don’t think there’s _____in what you’ve said.
A. anything interest B. anything of interest
C. interest of anything D. interesting anything
30. Nobody noticed the thief slip into the courtyard because the light happened to _____.
A. be turned on B. be put up C. go out D. give in
31. They were not yet aware of the hopelessness of their situation, _____the lack of fresh water on the lifeboat.
A. giving B. given C. to give D. being given
32. _____ she wondered if she had made a mistake.
A. Not until long afterwards that
B. It was not until long afterwards that
C. Not long until afterwards
D. It was long afterwards until
33. Hello! I ____ you _____ in Beijing. How long have you been here?
A. don’t know, were B. haven’t known, are
C. didn’t know, were D. hadn’t known, are
34. Ten years had passed. I found she had ____.
A. much white hair B. a little white hair
C. a few white hairs D. a white head of hairs
35. Chaplin, for ____ life had once been very hard, directed a film about life in an American factory.
A. whom B. whose C. that D. which
第二节 完形填空（共20小题：每小题1.5分，满分30分）
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从36-55各题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项。
I made a promise to myself on the drive down to the vacation beach cottage. For two weeks I 36 try to be a loving husband and father. Totally 37 . No ifs, ands or buts.
The idea had come to me as I listened to a commentator 38 my car’s tape player. He was 39 a passage about husbands being 40 of their wives. 41 he went on to say, “Love is an act of 42 . A person can choose to love.” To myself, I had to admit that I had been a selfish husband 43 our love had been dulled by my own insensitivity (感觉迟钝) . In unimportant ways, really; scolding Evelyn for her tardiness (拖拉); 44 on the TV channel I wanted to watch; throwing 45 day – old newspapers that I knew Evelyn still wanted to read. Well, for two weeks all that would 46 .
And it 47 . Right from the moment I kissed Evelyn at the door and said, “That new yellow sweater looks 48 on you.” “Oh, Tom, you noticed,” she said, surprised and 49 , maybe a little puzzled.
After the long drive, I wanted to sit and read. Evelyn 50 a walk on the beach. I started to refuse, but then I thought, “Evelyn’s been alone here with the children 51 week and now she wants to be alone with me.” We walked on the beach while the children flew their kites.
So it went. Two weeks of not calling the Wall Street investment (投资) firm 52 I am director; a visit to the shell museum, 53 I usually hate museums (and I enjoyed it); 54 my tongue while Evelyn’s getting ready for a late dimmer for us. Relaxed (轻松) and happy, that’s how the whole vacation passed. I made a new promise to keep on 55 to choose love.
36. A. used to B. would C. should D. could
37. A. loving B. lovely C. lovable D. loved
38. A. at B. with C. on D. on
39. A. thinking B. writing C. believing D. reading
40. A. helpful B. useful C. thoughtful D. hopeful
41. A. Instead B. Then C. Otherwise D. Thus
42. A. play B. will C. promise D. story
43. A. that B. but C. when D. if
44. A. insisting B. hanging C. sticking D. suggesting
45. A. about B. up C. away D. in
46. A. happen B. change C. develop D. forbid
47. A. would B. had C. did D. was
48. A. great B. big C. sorry D. tight
49. A. frightened B. anxious C. took D. pleased
50. A. asked B. suggested C. took D. began
51. A. all of B. all C. all of a D. all a
52. A. which B. what C. where D. that
53. A. if B. but C. as D. though
54. A. stopping B. preventing C. keeping D. holding
55. A. reminding B. requiring C. repaying D. remembering
第三部分：阅读理解（共20小题；每小题2分，满分40分）
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项。
A
The “standard of living” of any country means the average person’s share of the goods and services which the country produces. A country’s standard of living, therefore, depends first and foremost on its ability to produce wealth. “Wealth” in this sense is not money, for we do not live on money but on things that money can buy: “goods” such as food and clothing, and “services” such as transport and entertainment.
A country’s ability to produce wealth depends upon many factors, most of which have an effect on one another. Wealth depends to a great extent upon a country’s natural resources, such as coal, gold, and other minerals, water supply and so on.
Next to natural resources comes the ability to turn them to use. China is perhaps as well as the U. S. in natural resources, but suffered for many years from wars, and for this and other reasons was unable to develop her resources. Stable political conditions and freedom from foreign invasion(侵略) , enable a country to develop its natural resources peacefully and steadily, and to produce more wealth than another country well served by nature but less well ordered. Another important factor is the technical efficiency (效能) of a country’s people. Old countries that have, through many centuries, trained up a lot of skilled workers and technicians are better placed to produce wealth than countries whose workers are laregely unskilled. Wealth also produces wealth. As a country becomes wealthier, its people have a large margin for saving, and can put their savings into factories and machines which will help workers to turn out more goods in their working day.
56. A country’s wealth lies in _____.
A. its standard of living
B. its ability to develop its natural resources
C. its ability to provide goods and services
D. its ability to provide transport and entertainment
57. The word “for most” means _____.
A. most importantly B. firstly
C. largely D. for the most part
58. Which of the following is true?
A. China does not have the ability to turn all its resources to use.
B. U. S. is wealthy just because it has a vast land.
C. According to the passage, water is not a kind of natural resource.
D. With rich natural resources, people can live better.
B
At 2:30 on December 5, 1945, five US Navy training planes took off in clear weather from the base Lauderdale, Florida. The planes flew east over the coast…and disappeared. The group was Flight 19, on a run between Florida and Bahamas. Tailor was the group leader. At about 3:40, Tailor reported that his compasses were not reading properly. The other planes followed their leaders aimlessly, first east, then west, then northeast over the ocean, as Tailor tried to make sure of the direction by radio. Then, suddenly Tailor was heard to give orders to dive…
Quickly, two giant Martin seaplanes were sent up to search for Flight 19. Several hours later, the wind became strong and visibility (能见度) dropped. A return to base was ordered. But only one of the Martin seaplanes landed. Four days later, the Navy and Coast Guard combed a 100,000 square miles area with more than 100 planes and ships. No sign was ever shown of the missing planes.
Today, people have noted the disappearance of many ships and planes in the southwest part of the North Atlantic and began to call this area the Bermuda Triangle (百幕大三角区).
The points of the triangle are Bermuda, Puerto Rico and a spot in the Gulf of Mexico, west of Florida. It is a two – faced water world of tiny islands, bright beaches and beautiful waters. Yet thick fogs, powerful currents (激流) and sudden storms are hidden behind this smiling surface.
59. Why did Flight 19 disappear?
A. Because the wind became strong and visibility dropped.
B. Because Tailor was given wrong orders to dive.
C. Because Tailor couldn’t read his compasses correctly.
D. Because something unknown made the compassed unable to work as usual.
60. In what position did Flight 19 disappear?
A. In the southeast part of the Atlantic Ocean.
B. In the northeast part of the Atlantic Ocean.
C. To the southwest of Bermuda in the Atlantic Ocean.
D. To the northeast of Bermuda in the Atlantic Ocean.
61. How many planes disappeared altogether that day?
A. Five. B. Six. C. Two. D. Only one.
62. The word “comb” in the passage means _____.
A. cover with B. fly over
C. do up one’s hair with a comb D. search all over
63. Which of the following shows the correct position of the Bermuda Triangle?
(F=Florida, Bm=Bermuda, PR=Puerto Rico, Bh=Barhamas, MG=the Gulf of Mexico, Atl =the Atlantic Ocean, B=Base)
It could happen to you
Many people think there is no need to take special care over home safety.
I’m all right, I’m insured (投保).
Maybe – if you’re fully insured. Even then you can never recover the value you place upon your possessions. But you can’t insure against the suffering of mind that we all feel if our homes are torn apart by some stranger, our windows and doors broken, our possessions ruined.
“It won’t happen to me.”
Won’t it? A house is broken into every three minutes of the day. Loss of all kinds, including cars and things stolen from cars, happens every 3 seconds.
“I’ve nothing worth stealing.”
You may think not. But in fact everyone has something worth a thief’s attention. And we all have things of personal value, even if they’re worth little or nothing in hard cash.
“I’m only a tenant (房客) here.”
Most thieves are on the lookout for easy pickings. They are soon discouraged by houses they can’t get into quickly and easily. So do pay special attention.
“This booklet will help you ……”
it’s based on the practical experience of police forces throughout the country. Most of the suggestions will cost you only a few minutes extra time and thought. A few may cost some expense, but this is small compared with the loss and sadness you might otherwise suffer.
If you are in any doubt, ask for free advice from the Crime (罪犯) Prevention Office at your local police station.
64. The text mainly tells us about _____.
A. how to escape being caught
B. how to take special care of ourselves
C. how to hire a safe house in the country
D. how to protect your home
65. We can learn from the text that_____.
A. it’s impossible to prevent a house from being broken into
B. we all have something that a thief thinks worth stealing
C. most thieves are good at stealing thing from cars
D. you can’t afford to get advice from your local police station
66. If a house if difficult to get into, _____.
A. the thief may give up trying
B. the thief will steal car or things from cars
C. the owner may think extra safety fittings are necessary
D. the owner may think there is no need to take special care
D
Attention to detail is something everyone can and should do especially in a tight job market. Bob Crossley, a human resources expert notices this in the job applications that comes across his desk every day. “It’s amazing how many candidates eliminate (淘汰) themselves,” he says.
“Resumes (求职书) arrive with stains. Some candidates don’t bother to spell the company’s name correctly. Once I see a mistake, I eliminate the candidate,” Crossley concludes, “If they cannot take care of these details, why should we trust them with a job?”
Can we pay too much attention to details? Absolutely. Perfectionists struggle over little things at the cost of something larger they work toward. “To keep from losing the forest for the trees,” says Charles Garfield, associate professor at the University of California, San Francisco. “We must constantly ask ourselves how the details we’re working on fit into the larger picture. If they don’t, we should drop them and move to something else.”
Garfield compares this process to his work as a computer scientist at NASA. “The Apollo II moon launch was slightly off – course 90 percent of the time, says Garfield, “But a successful landing was still likely because we knew the exact position of our goal. This allowed us to make adjustments (调节) as necessary. “Knowing where we want to go helps us judge the importance of every task we undertake.”
Too often we believe what accounts for others’ success is some special secret or a lucky break, But rarely is success so mysterious. Again and again, we see that by doing little things within our grasp well, large rewards follow.
67. According to the passage, some job applicants were rejected _____.
A. because of their carelessness as shown in their failure to present a clean copy of a resume
B. because of their limited education as shown in their poor spelling in writing a resume
C. because they failed to give a detailed description of their background in their application
D. because they eliminated their names from the applicants’ list themselves
68. The word “perfectionists” refuse to those who _____.
A. demand others to get everything absolutely right
B. know how to adjust their goals according to the circumstances
C. pay too much attention to details only to lose their major objectives
D. are capable of achieving perfect results in whatever they do
69. The example of Apllo II moon launch is given to illustrate that _____.
A. minor mistakes may not be noticed in achieving major objectives
B. failure is the mother of success
C. adjustments are the key to the successful completion of any work
D. keeping one’s goal in mind helps in deciding which details can be overlooked
70. The best title for this passage would be _____.
A. Don’t Be a Perfectionist B. Importance of Adjustments
C. Details and Major Objectives D. Hard Work Plus Good Luck
E
Though salivation (分泌唾液) is natural, Pavlov noticed that a dog would salivate not just when it was eating, but also when it saw the man who usually fed it. In Pavlov’s early experiments he simply showed the dog some bread, enough to make the dog salivate. We cannot call this a natural reflex because a dog does not normally salivate at the sight of man. It is what psychologists call a ‘ conditioned response’(条件反射反应). The dog has been taught, or ‘ conditioned’, to salivate when he sees the man.
Having decided to study this, Pavlov developed scientific methods for doing so. In order to make sure the experimenter did not disturb the dog and experimenter were put in separate rooms. Pavlov even put the dog in a kind of frame to make it stand still. He invented a system of tubes for giving the dog food, and watched what happened from outside the room. He found that he could condition the dog to salivate at almost any event – when a bell rang or a light flashed, for example – as long as this event was followed by food.
The American psychologist Skineer developed this idea of conditioning. He could condition animals to do quite complicated things by using a technique he called ‘shaping’. He could teach pigeons, for example, to play table tennis. At first he gave them a reward for knocking the ball a short distance in the right direction. Slowly he increased the distance they must knock the ball before getting the reward, and eventually they received it only when they knocked the ball past their opponent (对手).
71. Which of the following is not the experimenters’ aim?
A. To make sure the experimenter did not disturb the dog.
B. To invent a system of tubes.
C. To condition the dog to salivate at almost any event.
D. To teach pigeons to knock the ball in the right direction.
72. In order to make the dog salivate, Pavolv did not ____.
A. ring the bell B. give the dog food
C. beat the dog D. put the dog in a frame
73. During experiments, Skinner ______.
A. gave pigeons a reward for knocking the ball into the hole
B. gave pigeons a reward for knocking the ball in opposite direction
C. decreased the distance because pigeons must knock the ball
D. gave pigeons a reward for knocking the ball past their ‘opponent’
74. An example of a ‘conditioned response’ is that _____.
A. a dog s mouth waters when it is eating
B. a dog is conditioned to salivate when he sees the man
C. a dog is trained by an experimenter
D. a dog is taught how to drink water
75. The underlined word “psychologist” means _____.
A. 心理学家 B.生理学家 C.物理学家 D.动物学家
第四部分：写作（共两节，满分35分）
第一节 短文改错（共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分）
The former White House cook stopped working last April. He cooked
in traditional French way. His food tasted well, but contained a 76. ________
lot of fat. Doctors say this is not healthier. Welter Scheib. 77. ________
the new chief cook, will have a medical doctor as adviser. 78. ________
Dr Dean Ornish is a heart specialist and writer. He says foods 79. ________
can be low in fat and still delicious. The President’s wife 80. ________
Hillary Clinton chose Mr Scheib after tasted his cooking. She 81. ________
wanted fewer fat in the food she ate in the White house. 82. ________
She wanted to eat more fresh vegetables, and including vegetable 83. ________
like the White House to serve more America food. 85. ________
第二节 书面表达（满分25分）
最近，你校同学正在参加某报社组织的一场讨论。讨论的主题是：中国是否应大力发展家用小汽车？请你根据下表所提供的信息，客观地介绍这两种不同的意见。
60%的同学认为： 40%的同学认为：
1．应大力发展 2．促进国家经济发展 3．增加就业机会 4．提高生活质量；方便、省时 1．应有限度地发展 2．增加城市交通拥挤，交通事故 3．修路占用土地 4．空气和噪音污染
注意：1．信的开头已为你写好。2．词数：100左右 3．参考词汇：国民经济-the national economy
About the discussion we’ve had about whether China should devote major efforts to developing car industry, opinions are divided on the question.
60% of the students
参考答案
1-5 BBCBC 6-10 CBCAB 11-15 CCBCB 16-20 CBBCB 21-25 CDDAB
26-30 CDABC 31-35 BBCCA 36-40 BACDC 41-45 BBAAC 46-50 BCADB
51-55 BCDDD 56-60 CAADC 61-65 BDADB 66-70 AACDC 71-75 BCDBA
76. well 改为good 77. healthier 改为healthy 78. adviser 前加an 79.√ 80. and 改为but 81. tasted 改为tasting 82. fewer 改为less 83. and 去掉 84. chemical 改为chemicals 85. America 改为American
第四部分第二节
About the discussion we’ve had about whether China should devote major efforts to developing car industry, opinions are divided on the question.
60% of the students think China should fully develop car industry. They believe this will speed up the development of the national economy. More workers will be employed. With cars the people’s life quality will be raised. They will save time and be more convenient in their life and work.
On the other hand, 40% of them think China should control its car industry development. Otherwise, the city traffic will be even heavier and more fraffic accidents will take place. At the same time, more land will be used for the new roads. What is more, air and noise pollution will become more serious.
听力材料
1. W: Is it true you only spent $ 32 on two dinners?
M: No, I only spent half of that.
2. M: Sally broke her arm last week.
W: How did she do that? She’d always been careful.
3. M: I was hoping that you’d wear your new dress. It’s much prettier.
W: But this one is more comfortable for hot weather.
4. M: Excuse me, are you Ann Robinson?
W: No, I’m not. I’m her sister.
5. M: If I go to the store, will you make dinner for us tonight?
W: Bring back enough food.
6. M: Hello, Jane.
W: Hi, Harry. Did you have a good summer holiday?
M: Sure. I went for my holiday on my uncle’s farm
W: Really? What interesting things did you do there?
M: I helped get in some rice, take care of the fruit garden and drove the tractor.
W: Drove a tractor?
M: Yes. It was easy to learn. Did you go away for your holiday, Jane?
W: Oh, no. I just stayed at home. My mother has been in hospital. I had to look after her and help do some cooking and washing at home.
M: I’m sorry. Oh, it’s late. I must be off now. Bye-bye.
7. M: Guess where I went this morning? I went to the Summer Palace at 5:30.
W: You got up so early. Did you have a good time?
M: Yes. It was the first time for me to go to the Summer Palace early in the morning. And I saw many people, especially older people doing morning exercises remained very still.
W: I know what you mean. They were doing “breathing exercises”.
M: I saw two old men sitting under a tree with their eyes closed. They must have been doing the same. There were also many people in the park practicing Taijiquan.
W: Same as Taijiquan, they are national sports. A lot of people practice them every day in the early morning in a park, on a playground, by a river or along the roadside.
8. W: Palace Theatre. Can I help you?
M: Do you have seats for Saturday evening’s Romeo and Juliet?
W: Yes, we’ve got tickets at $ 3.50, $ 5or $ 7.50.
M: I’d like to reserve four tickets at $ 5, please. Can I collect them on Saturday?
W: Yes, but you must pick them up at least half an hour before the performance. Can I have your name?
M: Smith. Mr. Peter Smith.
W: Right. That’s four seats at $ 5 for Saturday, the 8th .
M: What time does it start?
W: 7:45.
M: Thank you. Goodbye.
9. W: Hello! I’m home! Tom?
M: Hi, Mum! I’m in here.
W: Oh, my God! What going on here?
M: I’ll clear it up later. I’ve nearly finished. What do you think?
W: It’s lovely. I like the roof. What a beautiful red! She’ll love it.
M: I haven’t painted the front door yet. What colour do you think it should be?
W: I think green would be nice…or yellow…or perhaps blue…Oh, I don’t know. Would you like me to make some curtains for it?
M: Oh, that would be great, Mum. Oh…by the way…I’m afraid I’ve got a bit of paint on the carpet over there. I’m terribly sorry.
W: Oh, you haven’t, Tom!
M: It’s alright. I think it will come out. If not, I’ll just paint the rest of the carpet the same colour.
10. I was driving along the road to fetch my daughter from school. We were going to go swinning together. I’d finished work at about 4 o’clock and then gone to the post office. Then I’d stopped off at a shop for some fruit and bread. We liked to have some fruit and bread to eat after our swim.
I was driving fast when suddenly I saw the cars in front of me start to move from side to side.
I slowed down. Then my car started to shake! Perhaps something had gone wrong with my car, I thought. I stopped and got out of the car. And at the same moment a big tree by the side of the road fell down onto the car in front of me. I understood it was an earthquake!
篇9：高考英语第一轮总复习讲座之十四（SBⅡ-Units 1-2）
一、单元考点提示
1.词汇
yard,horse-drawn,sign,film-maker,strict,button,castle,garage, beard, imagine, in t he hope of, take along, bring on, lose heart, day after day, used to, pick up, go through,go straight ahead,be well-known as an artist, be pleased with, have no idea, in this way smoker,packet, chance, public, club, cigarette, typewriter, nation, habit, therefore drug, smelly, share,give up, persuade sb. to do sth., go ahead, ask sb.for permission, at present,millions of, be caused by, sales of tobacco, fall asleep, catch fire,burn down, one third of, a packet of cigarettes, one third of/a third of, persuade sb.to do sth., die from, be reduced by, compared with, remain in business, encourage sb. to do sth., give up, be used to, get sb. into the habit of, call for.
2.句型
(1)Excuse me. Can you tell me the way to…?
(2)Excuse me. How can I get to …→
(3)Go through the gate and you’ll…
(4)Excuse me, please. Where’s the…?
(5)Do you mind if I do…?
(6)Would you mind if I did…?
(7)Do(would)you mind(one/one’s)doing…?
(8)I wonder if I can/could do…
3.语法
1.学习名词性从句作宾语的用法
2.名词性从句作表语
5.交际用语
(1)Go straight ahead till you see…
(2)It’s about…yards/metres down this street.
(3)Excuse me. How can I get to …?
(4)Excuse me, please. Where’s the nearest men’s room?
(5)Do you mind if I do…?
(6)I’m sorry, but it’s not allowed.
(7)Would you mind if I did…?No. Go ahead.
(8)I wonder if I could use your phone. Sure, go ahead.
二、考点精析与拓展
1.take 短语归纳
take along 带着，带在身边；take one’s place 坐某人的座位，代替某人的职位；take medicine 吃药；take steps采取步骤；take measures采取措施；take advice 接受建议；take a taxi坐出租车；take a look at 看；take a bath/walk/rest/trip洗澡/散步/休息/旅行；take away拿走; take down拿下，记录下；take back 带回，收回（话）；take off脱下（衣、鞋、帽），（飞机）起飞；take out取出；take place 发生；take the place of代替，取代；take up 开始，拿起;take a deep breath深呼吸；take one’s temperature量体温；take a photo照像;take a photograph of给……拍照；take one’(a)seat 坐下，坐好；take aim at 瞄准；take charge of 负责（管理某事或照顾某人）；take…for把……误当作；take hold of 抓住；take interest对……发生兴趣；take it easy别紧张，别过累；take notes作笔记；take notice of 注意；take office就职；take a new look on呈现新面貌；take on workers 雇佣工人；take part in参加（活动）；take pride in 为……而骄傲；take the lead带头；take trouble费劲（力）；take the side of 支持某人（方）；take a day off某一天休假，不工作；take one’s time从容行事，慢慢来；take turns轮流。
[应用]完成句子。
①你为什么不带你妈妈参加音乐会呢？
Why don’t you ________ _______ your mother__________to the
concert?
②墙上的地图太旧了，取下来吧。
The map on the wall is to old. _________ _________ ________.
③对不起，我收回我刚才的话。
Sorry. I _______ _______ what I said just now.
④我把他当成我弟弟了。
I ________him _________ my younger brother.
Key:①take,along
②Take, it ,down
③take, back
④took,for
2.sign
1)用作名词：traffic signs交通标志；road signs 路标；
signs for the rest rooms厕所标志：signs of heart trouble 心脏病的迹象，signs of rain/earthquake下雨/地震的预兆。
2）用作动词，表示“签名，作手势”。如：sign one’s name签名；sign the agreement 签署协议；sign to sb.朝某人做手势；sign to sb.to do sth.做手势让某人干某事。
[应用]完成句子
①董事长在文件上签了名。
The president_______ ______ ______to the paper.
②警察做手势叫我停下。
The policeman ________ ________ ________ _______.
Key:①singed,his,name
②singed,me,to,stop
3.ahead短语归纳
go ahead朝前走，请便（同意对方继续干或同意对方的请求）；go ahead (on)with… 继续；ahead of在……前面，早于，优先；ahead of time提前
[应用]完成句子
①他朝前走去看看发生了什么事情。
He ________ ________ to see what had happened.
②我可以坐这个座位吗？请坐吧。
May I take this seat?________ _______.
③汤姆的数学比玛丽好。
Tom is ________ _______ Mary in maths.
④她比我早到2个小时。
She arrived two hours _______ _______me.
⑤他们已提前三周完成了设计。
They have completed the design ________ _______ ________ _______time.
Key:①went,ahead ②Go,ahead
③/ ④ahead,of
⑤three,weeks,ahead,of
4.祈使句+and+陈述句
1）这种结构可以替换成“条件句+陈述句”。如：
Work hard,and you’ll be successful in time./If you work hard,you will be successful in time.
只要你努力，一定会成功。
注意：祈使句后and可替换成then.
2）祈使句+or+否定陈述句=否定条件句+否定陈述句。如：
Get ready or you won’t pass the test./ If you don’t get ready,you won’t pass the test.
做好准备，要不你小测验不会及格的。
注意：祈使句后的or可替换成otherwise.
[应用]单句改错
①Be active,you will have the chance.
②If you have a good rest,and you will be all right.
Key:①you 前加and 或then ②去掉and
1.问路及答语
1）问：①Excuse me,can you tell me the way to the post office?
劳驾，你能告诉我去邮局的路吗？
②How can I get to the hospital?
我怎样才能到医院呢？
③Which is the way to the market?
哪条路是通往市场的呢？
④Where is the nearest men’s room?
最近的厕所在哪里？
2）答语：
Go straight ahead till you see…一直朝前走，直到看见……./ Go through the gate and you’ll find…等过大门你就会看到……。/It’s about…metres down the street. 沿这条街走……米就是。/It’s …yards from here.它离这儿有……码？/Take this street round to the right of…顺着这条街绕到……的右边。
[应用]完成句子
①怎么去电影院？直接朝前走你就会看到的。
_________ is the way to the cinema _______ _______ _______and you’ll find it.
②去火车站怎么走？
________ can I ________ _______ the railway station?
Key:①Which,Go,straight,ahead
②How,get, to
6.只能接动名词作宾语的词
1）动词：admit,advise,consider,delay,enjoy,excuse,escape, finish,forbid,imagine,keep,mind,miss, practise,suggest, unders-
tand
2)词组:insist on, think of, give up, dream of, hear of,depend on,feel like,devote to, be used to,can’t help,prevent… from,look forward to, put off, be worth
[应用]选择正确答案
①The squirrel was lucky that it just missed ________.
A.catching B.to be caught
C.being caught D.to catch
②Only one of these books is _________.
A.worth to read B.worth being read
C.worth of reading D.worth reading
③I really enjoy ________ that kind of job.
A.do B.doing C.to do D.to be doing
④“What are you going to do this morning?”
“I’m thinking of _______ to visit my aunt.”
A.go B.going
C.having gone D.my going
Key:①C ②D ③B ④B
7.只能接不定式作宾语的动词
下列动词只能接不定式作宾语，不能接动名词：
agree,ask,choose, decide, demand,expect, hope,learn,long, ma-
nage,offer,plan,promise, pretend, refuse,wish,set out, determine,
would love.
[应用]选择正确答案
①We agree _______ here but so far she hasn’t turned up yet.
(MET’95)
A.having met B.meeting
C.to meet D.to have met
②She pretended __________ me when I passed by.(MET’89)
A.not to see B.not seeing
C.to not see D.having not seen
③Little Jim should love ______ to the theatre this even-
ing.(met’92)
A.to be taken B.to take
C.being taken D.taking
Key:①C ②A ③A
8.in the hope of
该短语表示“期待，抱有……的希望”，后接名词、代词或动名词，可替换成：in the hope that 从句或hoping to…。对比:
They got up very early in the hope of catching the first bus.
他们起得很早，希望能赶上头班车。
注意：have the hope of…/There be hope of…有希望
对比：She has the hope of success.
她有成功的希望。
There is still hope of persuading him to change his mind.
还有希望说服他改变主意。
[应用]一句多译：
他到那里去，希望买一些新鲜鱼。
He went there in the hope of buying some fresh fish./He
Went there in the hope that he could buy some fresh fish./He went there hoping to buy some fresh fish.
9.imagine
1)接名词、代词：You can’t imagine the life on the island.你无法想象岛上的生活。
2）接动名词：She never imagined her going abroad for further education.她从没设想过会出国深造。
3）接从句：You can’t imagine how worried I was those days.你想象不到那几天我是多么焦虑啊。
4）接复合宾语：The boy imagined himself to be a hero. 这男孩把自己想象成了英雄。
[应用] 选择正确答案
I can hardly imagine Peter ______across the Atlantic Ocean in five days.(MET’91)
A.sail B.to sail C.sailing D.to have sailed
Key:C
10.“at+名词”表示“在进行，从事”
at work 在工作；at table在吃饭；at play 在做游戏；at sea 出海；at university/college在上学;at night school在上夜校；at dinner/table在吃饭；at peace处于和平状态；at war在交战，在打仗
[应用]完成句子。
①别人在工作，不要吵闹。
Don’t make any noise while others are ______ ________.
②孩子们在游戏，而他们的父母正在吃饭。
The children were ______ ________ while their parents were_______ _______.
Key:①at, work
②at,play,at,dinner
11.open
1)用作动词：open a door/window/a small shop/one’s hand/one’s eyes/one’s mouth/fire开门/开窗/开一家小商店/张开手/睁开眼/张开嘴/开火；be opened to traffic通车；open up开采（发）
2）用作形容词：keep open开着门；be open开门、开业；cut…open切开；leave the door open 开着门；in the open air 在野外；an open secret公开的秘密；keep one’s eyes open睁眼
[应用]选择正确答案
①John was so sleepy that he could hardly keep his eyes________.(MET’92)
A.open B.to be opened
C.to open D.opening
②Some new oilfields ________since 1976.
A.were opened up B.has been opened up
C.have been opened up D.had been opened up
③The computer center, _________ last year,is very popular among the students in this school.
A.open B.opening
C.having opened D.opened
Key:①A ②C ③D
12.区别下列用法
1)as(so)far as 和……一样远，远至（原级比较或表示距离）；就……来讲
2)as(so)long as 和……一样长（原级比较）；只要（引导条件
状语从句）
3）as well as和……一样好；既……也……（连接并列成分）
4）as good as和……一样好；事实上（作状语）
[应用]完成句子
①他们实际上已经答应帮助我们了。
They have ________ _______ ______ promised to help us.
②油漆后的这辆自行车和新的一样。
Painted, this bike is _______ _____ ______ a new one.
③小李英语说得和汉语一样好。
Xiao Li speaks English ______ ______ _____ she speaks
Chinese.
④他和他的父母对我都很好。
He _______ ______ ______his parents is kind to me.
⑤晚饭后我们一直到走山脚下。
After supper we walked _______ ______ ______the foot of the
hill.
⑥就我所知，他将离开两个月。
______ ______ ______I know, he’ll be away for two months.
⑦只要努力，你一定会成功。
________ _________ ________you work hard, you’ll succeed in
time.
⑧这座新建的桥据说和旧的一样长。
This newly – built bridge is said to be _________ ________
_________the old one.
Key:①②as good as;③④as well as
⑤as far as ⑥As, far,as
⑦As/so,long,as ⑧as,long,as
13.形容词+with
be pleased with sb./sth.对……满意；be satisfied with 对……满意；be busy with sth.忙于某事；be careful with 对……注意、细心；be connected with与……有联系；be lined with 排列，站队；be patient with sb.对某人有耐心；be popular with受欢迎；be strict with sb.对某人严格要求；be wrong with 出毛病，不顺心；be disappointed with对……失望；be angry with sb.生某人的气
[应用]完成句子
①作为一名老师你应该对学生有耐心。
As a teacher you should_______ _______ ______ your students.
②每条路旁都栽上了树。
Every road ______ ______ _____ trees.
③我们老师对工作认真，对学生也很严格。
Our teacher is not only strict _________ his work but also________his students.
④夫妻都忙于工作，因而无暇顾及孩子。
Both husband and wife _______ ______ ______their work,so they
have no time to care for the child.
Key: ①be, patient,with
②is, lined,with
③in, with
④are,busy,with
14.heart短语归纳
lose heart 失去信心；lose one’s heart to sb./sth.爱上某人/事；give heart to sb.鼓励某人；give one’s heart sb./sth.爱上某人/事；put one’s heart into 一心扑在某事上；heart and soul全心全意地；have a kind heart有一幅好心肠;break one’s heart使某人伤心；learn…by heart 记住，背诵；with a heavy/light heart 心情沉重地/轻松愉快地
[应用]完成句子
①这个队一场比赛未赢，结果灰心了。
The team had won no game and it ________ ________.
②我们很奇怪她怎么爱上一个外国老头。
We wonder why she ________ _________ ________ _______an
old foreigner.
③世上无难事，只怕有心人。
Nothing is too difficult in the world if you _______ _______
________ _______it.
④全心全意地为人民服务是一个党员的义务。
It’s the duty of a Party member to serve the people ________
_________ _________ __________.
Key:①lost,heart
②lost,her,heart,to
③put,your,heart,into
④heart,and,soul
15.in the last few years.
该短语意为“最近几年”，常和现在完成时连用，表示以前某时开始一直延续至说话时的动作或状态。in可被during或over 替换。常用的还有：during the past ten days过去的10天里；over the last 5 months过去的5个月里；in the past few weeks 过去的几周里如：
We’ve learned quite a lot of English over the past three years.
三年来我们学了不少英语。
[应用]单句改错
①Many factories were built in the last ten years in my hometown.
②Both my father and mother have been busy since the past few weeks.
Key:①改were 为have been
②改since为for/in/over
16.reduce
reduce the number of减少……的数量；
reduce the cost/one’s weight/the price/speed降低成本/减肥/降价/减速
注意：reduce是increase的反义词。与by连用表示“减少了多少”；与to连用则表示“减少到多少”。
[应用]完成句子
①今年吸烟人数已减少了30%
The number of smokers has been reduced _________30%.
②现在一辆自行车的成本已降低到50美元。
Now the cost of a bike has been reduced _______50 dollars.
Key:①by ②to
17.chance
1)用于短语：
give sb.a chance给某人一次机会；
have a chance to do sth.有机会做；
miss a chance错过机会；
lose a chance失去机会；
2)用于句型：
The chance is that…/ The chances are that…表示“有可能……”（句型中的The和That 可省略）。如：
The chance is (that)she’s already heard the news.
可能她已听到那则消息了。
Chances are that the new machine will arrive tomorrow.
新机器可能明天到。
3）后接of 或that从句表示“可能性”。如：
He has no chance of winning the match.
他不可能赢得这次比赛。
There is a chance that I will see him.
我有可能见到他。
[应用]一句多译：
那里有可能藏着蛇。
The chances are that there is a snake over there.
There is a chance of a snake hiding there.
There is a chance that a snake is over there.
18．cause v.导致，引起
1）接名词：cause an accident/trouble/death/a fire/a serious illness/damage引起事故/惹麻烦/导致死亡/引起大火/导致重病/造成损害
2）接双宾语：cause sb.pain/trouble/damage给某人带来痛苦/麻烦/损害
3）接复合宾语：cuase sb. to do sth使某人做某事
[应用]完成句子
①什么使她改变了计划？
What _______ _______ ______ _______her plan?
②地震使所有的楼房倒塌了。
The earthquake ________ all the buildings ________ _______.
Key:①caused,her,to,change
②cuased,to,fall
19.permission短语归纳
ask for permission请求许可；
ask sb.for permission to do sth.请求某人允许做某事；
ask permission to do sth.请求得到允许做某事；
give sb.permission to do sth.允许某人做；
with one’s permission经某人允许；
without one’s permission 未经允许；
如：You have to ask the teacher for permission to do that.
你应该得到老师的同意再去做那件事。
You have to ask permission to go there.
你应该请求许可到那里去。
[应用]选择正确答案
No permission has _______ for anybody to enter the building.
(MET’88)
A.been given B.given
C.to give D.be giving
Key:A
20.接不定式和动名词意义不同的词
1）remember doing/having done记得曾做过某事remember to do记住去做某事 对比：
Do you remember meeting me at a party last year?
Please remember to write to your parents when you get there.
2)regret doing/having done 后悔做了（或没做）某事/regret to do遗憾地去做某事 对比：
I regret telling her the truth.
I regret to say that you are completely wrong.
3）try to do 尽力去做/try doing 试着去做
对比：She tried to learn it by heart.
She tried adding more salt to the soup.
4)forget doing 忘记曾经做过/forget to do忘记去做
对比：I forget reading about it in a magazine.
Don’t forget to shut off the gas when you finish cooking.
5)stop doing 停止做/stop to do 停止某一动作去作另一动作（说明停止的目的）
对比：They didn’t start until it stopped raining .
We stopped to see what was going on.
6)mean doing 意味着/mean to do 打算，意图做
对比：Missing the train means waiting for an hour.
I meant to come, but a friend of mine went to see me .
7)want doing 需要（物作主语，动名词主动表示被动）/want to do 想做（人作主语）
对比：The wall wants painting. I want to paint the wall myself.
[应用]选择正确答案
①-You were brave enough to raise objections at the meeting.(MET’95)
-Well,now I regret ________ that.
A.to do B. to be doing
C.go having done D.having done
②-I usually go there by train.
-Why not ________by boat for a change?(MET’92)
A.to try going B.trying to go
C.to try and go D.try going
③-The light in the office is still on.
-Oh ,I forgot _________.(MET’91)
A.turning it off B.turn it off
C.to turn it off D.having turned it off
④She reached the top of the hill and stopped _______on a big rock by the side of the path.(MET’90)
A.to have rested B.resting
C.to rest D.rest
⑤She didn’t remember _______ him before.(MET’88)
A.having met B.have met
C.to meet D.to having met
Key:①D ②D ③C ④C ⑤A
21.in.after表示“在……之后”
in接段时间，只用于一般现在将来时中；而after可以接点时间，也可以接段时间，可用于将来时，过去时。
对比：I’ll be back in two hours.我两个小时以后回来。
I’ll be back after 2:00p.m.我下午2点以后回来。
He went to see his teacher and came back after two hours.
他去看望了他的老师，2个小时之后回来了。
A foreign film was shown after supper.
晚饭后放映了一场外国电影。
[应用]选择正确答案
①Your new suit will be ready _______ two days.(85高考)
A.in B．on C．for D．over
②The doctor will be free _______ .(MET’92)
A.10 minutes later B.after 10 minutes
C.in 10 minutes D.10 minutes after
Key:①A ②C
22.go/do without
该短语表示“没有……将就着也行”。Without既是介词也是副词，亦即带不带宾语都行。
[应用]完成句子
①他没钱买电视，只能过着没有电视的日子。
He had no money for a TV set,so he had to _______ _______ ______.
②我们没有地图也行。
We have no map but we can ________ ________
Key:①go,without,it ②do,without
三、精典名题导解
1. These photographs will show you_________.
A.what does our village look like
B.what our village look like
C.how does our village look like
D.how our village looks like
本题答案为B。
精析：该题考查两方面的内容：a)宾语从句的语序问题；b）表示“……看起来像……”时，该用什么结构。通常情况下，宾语从句中应用正常语序，即：主语+谓语，不用倒装语序，A、C应排除。当我们要表示“某人或某事物像……”之意时，须用“what…look like”的结构，D不符。
2._________him and then try to copy what he does.(NMET 199912)
A.Mind B.Glance at C.Stare at D.Watch
本题答案为D。
精析：该题考查两点：a)检查使用祈使句+and…，祈使句+or的掌握情况；b)考查表感观一组词之区别。根据词义A可排除；“glance at”表“看一看”，指“一看”的动作，显然不合题意舍去。“stare at”表示“盯”
“凝视”之意，也不合题意，删去。Watch表示“注视”的意思，正合题意。
3.-Do you mind my taking this seat?
-__________. (NMET 199513)
A.Yes,sit down please B.No,of course not
C.Yes,take it please D.No,you can’t take it
本题答案为B。
精析：此题考查的目的是：检查考生对由that引起的问句应如何回答。通常，回答这种问句的方式有两种：1）如果表示同意某人做某事（即表示不反对、或不介意）常可答：No,of course not. Certainly not.No,not at all. Oh,no,please.或No,go ahead;2)如表示不同意某人做某事（即表示介意），可答：I’m sorry,but…Sorry,but I’m afraid you can’t.从所提供答案来看，A、C、D均不合题意，删除。B与题意相符。
4.Go and get your coat. It’s __________ you left it.(NMET 199115)
A.there B.where C.there where D.where there
本题答案为B。
精析：此题是考查表语从句的用法。A.there不能引导表语从句，排除；C.there where you left it,there之后不能用where引导的从句来修饰，故排除；D.where there,既用了引导词where,就不能再用there,所以D也须舍去。
5.-Do you mind if I keep pets in this building?
-___________.
A.I’d rather you didn’t,actually
B.Of course not,it’s not allowed here
C.Great!I love pets
D.No,you can’t
本题答案为A。
精析：B、D选项直接拒绝，语气过于生硬，不友好，C项过于热情，不合实际，A项则回答得很委婉，有礼貌。
6．We all agree with him on_______he said.
A.what B.that C.why D.how
本题答案为A。
精析：位于介词之后的宾语从句一般不能由what引导，但介词except、in、but、besides除外，此题题干所给的介词是on,所以，B不对。表示“所说（做，想）的”等意思时，应用what,不用why,how.
7.I won’t go with you. It’s _________ cold outside today.
A.so much B.too much C.very so D.much too
本题答案为D。
精析：因cold为形容词，不能用so much来修饰。very to为错误表达方式，故排除。too much 可用来修饰名词、动词。much too表“实在太”之意，用来修饰形容词与副词。
8.It’s wrong ________ help him.
A.for you to B.for you not to
C.of you to D.of you not to
本题答案为D。
精析：英语中形容词可分两类：一是描述主语的品行、道德行为的，如：nice,good,wrong,careful,careless,foolish,clever等。这类形容词之后的不定式复合结构常用介词of，其常用结构为：It’s+此类形容词+of sb.to do…;另一类是描述主语的性质特点的，如：hard,easy,difficult,necessary,important等。用此类形容词时，其后的不定式复合结构，须用介词for。因本句的形容词是wrong，A、B排除；C为肯定式，不合题意，舍去。
9.-Would you go to the concert with me?
-_________,but I’m very busy now.
A.I’d like to B.Sure
C.No problem D.Certainly
本题答案为A。
精析：根据两者对话的内容结果来看，答方因自己目前很忙，委婉拒绝了对方的邀请。按照英美人的习惯，即使是拒绝对方的邀请，也要让对方觉得自己是愿意接受对方邀请的，只是由于某种客观条件的不允许，因故不能前往。B、C、D是表同意对方邀请之答语，不合题意舍去。
四、课后巩固训练
Ⅰ、单项填空(共25小题)
1.courage A.thought B.brought C.country D.double
2.merchant A.machine B.chemistry C.technique D.charge
3.desert A.user B.seize C.signal D.seaside
4.shoulder A.mouth B.nervous C.round D.though
5.glove A.discover B.frog C.globe D.explode
B)从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳答案。
6. I bought a coat for only 20 yuan: it was a real_______.
A.coat B.clothing C.goods D.bargain
7. On the beautiful small island,_______very peaceful.
A.there is B.it is C.there was D.it has
8. To learn English well,listening is also important_______reading.
A.except B.besides C.including D.except that
9. Jack_______an honest man,who had been done wrong.
A.turned out to be B.appeared to be
C.must be D.may be
10. He_______“Thank you”in his life.
A.has never heard say B.was never heard to say
C.didn’t hear to say D.was never hear say
11. I’m sorry that I can’t_______a room with you because I_______alone.
A.share;am used to being B.spare;used to be
C.have;am used to be D.stay;used to being
12. The old lady_______the children playing near her house.
A.forever scoldsB.is forever scolding
C.is forever troubling D.forever troubled
13. I_______some photos to be developed._______they ready yet?
A.will leave;Will B.have left;Have C.left;Were D.left;Are
14. -You look hot.
-Yes,_______.
A.I’m running B.I’ve been running
C.I often run D.I’ve stopped running
15. She is the only one among the_______writers who_______stories for the children.
A.woman;writes B.women;writes
C.woman;write D.women;write
16. This is_______dictionary I need most.
A.the just B.right C.same D.the very
17. It is unnccssary for yor to ask the answer_______the question_______the teacher.
A.to;from B.of;from C.to;of D.for;of
18. The old man does a lot of_______in order to keep bealthy.
A.walkB.walks C.walking D.walkings
19. A yellow car suddenly stoppded,as there was another car_______the other direction.
A.come on B.coming in C.come to D.coming to
20. Computers well be used more and more in the future_______they will play an important part in all the fields.
A.so that B.because C.for D.as well as
21. Many warm-blooded animals_______hibernate.
A.need not to B.does not need to C.needn’t D.do not need
22. I remember_______to help us if we ever got into trouble.
A.once offering B.his once offering
C.him to offer D.to offer
23. _______a certain mineral which was even more radioactive than Uranium.
A.It had B.It is C.There was D.There is
24. A dinner was given_______the delegation.
A.in a honour of B.in an honour of
C.in the honour of D.in honour of
25. _______people in their best clothes there are in the square!
A.How many B.How a lot of C.What many D.What a lot of
Ⅱ、完形填空(共25小题)
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从26-50各题所给的四个选项中选出一个最佳答案。
Many people think advertisements are useful and helpful.But a man 26 said how useless it was to advertise.“Last week,”he said,“my umbrella was 27 ”.from a London church.As it is 28 ,I spent twice 29 much money in advertising,but did not 30 .
“ 31 did you write your advertisement?”asked one of the 32 ,a businessman.
“ 33 it is,”said the man,taking out of his pocket a piece 34 from a paper,which 35 “Lost from the City Church Last Sunday,a black 36 umbrella.The gentleman who 37 it will receive 5 if he puts it 38 10 Broad Street.”
The businessman said,“I often advertise and find it pays me 39 .But how it is 40 is of much 41 .Let’s try again.If it fails,I’ll buy you one.”
Then the man wrote,“If the man who 42 to take an umbrella from the City Church last Sunday evening 43 wish to get into trouble,he will return it to 10 Broad Street.He’s well 44 .”
Soon this appeared in the paper.The next morning,the man was 45 when the opened the door and saw at 46 twelve umbrellas.His own was among them.Many had notes 47 to them,saying that 48 had been taken by mistake and 49 the loser not to say 50 about the matter.
26.A.ever B.still C.once D.yet
27.A.stolen B.missing C.disappeared D.taken
28.A.an object B.a thing C.a present D.a tool
29.A.more B.than C.so D.as
30.A.put it back B.hold it back C.get it back D.keep it back
31.A.When B.Where C.How D.What
32.A.lookers B.watchers C.reporters D.listeners
33.A.So B.Here C.As D.What
34.A.written B.broken C.published D.cut
35.A.read B.wrote C.meant D.explained
36.A.gold B.plastic C.silk D.cotton
37.A.steals B.finds C.owns D.repairs
38.A.on B.with C.in D.at
39.A.nothing B.something C.well D.little
40.A.said B.expressed C.told D.explained
41.A.importance B.use C.help D.care
42.A.had B.ought C.was seen D.was made
43.A.won’t B.shouldn’t C.didn’t D.doesn’t
44.A.paid B.know C.said D.praised
45.A.surprised B.frightened C.satisfied D.interested
46.A.all B.most C.least D.best
47.A.written B.led C.hung D.tied
48.A.they B.it C.he D.there
49.A.begging B.warning C.wanting D.telling
50.A.any longer B.any much C.any more D.any thing
Ⅲ、阅读理解(共20小题，满分40分)
A)阅读下列短文，从每题所给的四个选项中选择最佳答案。
A
Every reader of this passage must spend whole of his waking life looking at things.Looking,like breathing,is natural,We do it without noticing it.Looking is passive-but seeing is action,and that is the explanation tor the title of this passage,Once you start seeing things you really begin to wake up.People who see things which others have only looked at,and seeing,draw conclusions from what they see,can add to man’s knowledge and help progress.
Someone recently diseovered a place where metal had been worked continuously longer than anywhere else in England.He“saw”a wall in the Forest of Dean.Thousands of people must have looked at it without really seeing it,but this man noticed that among the usual stones of that place were bits and pieces of a different colour;they also felt different to the hand.A colour showed that these pieces had been left behind in the fires of ancient people who had smelted rocks to get metals.Looking around,he found more and more information,until the history of what men had done at that place over tens of centuries was known.
You don’t have to go far to make similar discoveries once you really start seeing.
51. “His waking life”means_______.
A.the time when he is waking up. B.the time when he is awake.
C.all the time he is alive. D.all the time he is breathing.
52. For this writer“seeing”means_______.
A.noticing things which need explaining.
B.doing sth.natural.
C.looking at things.
D.doing sth.without noticing it.
53. The man who“saw”the wall got more and more information_______.
A.from thousands of people who had looked at it.
B.from a history book.
C.from the usual stones of that place.
D.from the unusual stones of that place.
54. What was it that“men had done at that place over tens of centuries?”
A.Looked at the stones. B.Seen the stones
C.Smelted metalsD.Build walls
55. Which of the following is nearest in meaning to the title“TO LOOK IS OT TO SEE?”
A.To die is not to kill. B.To listen is not to hear.
C.To watch is not to wait. D.To sit is not to stand.
B
Unlike most plants,animals are living beings that are able to move about to search for food.
Scientists divide animals into two groups.The animals in the first group are those with backbones and the second group includes those without backbones.
Birds,fish and mammals(哺乳动物)are included in the first group.Among them,mammals are considered as the most complex(复杂的)animals.Mammals have hair or fur.They nurse(给…喂奶)their young.Most people use the word“animal”when they are talking about mammals,such as the dog,cat,cow,horse or monkey.
Most of the second group live in water.The largest animal on earth is the blue whale.A whale often grows more than 30mitres long and weighs more than 100 tons.The elephant is the largest land animal and the ostrich(鸵鸟)is the largest bird.
56. Which of the following is true according to the passage?
A.No plants can move about as animals do.
B.Animal can manage to find food by themselves.
C.Animals are living things while plants aren’t.
D.All living beings are able to move about for food.
57. An animal can be included in the first or second group,as depends on whether it has_______.
A.hair B.fur C.a backbone D.Both A and B.
58. Mammals_______.
A.belong to those without backbones
B.surely have both hair and fur
C.are the complelx animals which can talk to each other as people do
D.can have babies and look after themselves
59. Which of the following do you think is the largest animal?
A.The elephant.B.The blue whale.
C.The ostrich.D.We don’t know.
60. Why do fish live in water? Because they_______.
A.have no backbones B.have no hair and fur
C.can’t breathe on land D.can have food there
C
Waller was a liked-by-all fellow,full of fun,who often went to coffee houses to tell people intereting stories,of which some,even brought him money.One day,asked by an office secretary who told Waller that his boss was a never seen before serious man and he never even smiled,Waller would tell a most funny story.“Well,air.”Waller said before be began the story.“What will be given in return if mine succeeds?”“$100,”“replied the secretary,”I haven’t seen him have a bright face since I worked in his office.
“Then let’s make it.”Waller went to the man’s table and whispered to him,“Please tell your boss that the funny man Waller’s hen gave birth to a baby.”
Three days later a letter reached Mr Waller in which were $100 and a piece of yellow paper with the works:“Mr Waller,you have succeeded-When I repeated your $100-worth sentence,my boss burst into frightening laughter,asking that whoever has managed to make laugh during the business hours will get dismissed(解雇).”
61. Waller often went to coffee house to tell people interesting stories in order to_______.
A.make money
B.practise telling stories
C.enjoy himself
D.draw the secretary’s attention
62. The secretary asked Waller for a most funny story because he_______.
A.was tired of his boss’ seriousness
B.tried to please his working conditions
C.wanted to improve his working conditions
D.wanted to see his boss’ laughing face
63. Saying “Let’s make it,”Waller_______.
A.was sure his success
B.thought of nothing but the 100-dollar return
C.knew that his hen had really given a birth to a baby
D.wondered whether he could make the boss smile or not
64. Which of the following ends is true according to the passage?
A.The boss was never so strict with the secretary from then on.
B.The secretary lost his job in the office.
C.The secretary dare not make his boss laugh any longer.
D.Mr Waller was dismissed at last.
65. The best title for the passage is_______.
A.Things Went Opposite to Wishes
B.Satisfying Both Sides
C.Killing Two Brids with One Stone
D.Either Is In His Proper Place
D
As far back as 700 B.C.,man had talked about children being cared by wolves, Romulus and Remus,the old story twin founders of Rome,were said to have been cared for by wolves.It is believed that when a she-wolf loses her baby,she tries to get a human child to take its place.This idea did not become believable until the late nineteenth century when a French doctor actually found a ten-year-old boy having nothing on walking around in the woods.He didn’t walk upright,could not speak,nor could he relate to people.He only growled(嗥叫)and stared at them.Finally the doctor won the boy’s confidence(信任)and began to work with him.After many long year of devoted and patient teaching,the doctor was able to get the boy to dress,feed himself,recognize and say a number of words,as write letters to from words.
66. The French doctor found the boy_______.
A.walking in strange wayB.writing letters to form words
67. According to the text we can infer that_______.
A.the boy was actually a baby-wolf
B.the boy was brought up by a she-wolf
C.the she-wolf had changed the boy into a wolf
D.having been brought up by a wolf,the boy could never live a human life
68. People before the late nineteen century didn’t believe_______.
A.wolves were man-eating animals
B.a she-wolf would care for a human child
C.a she-wolf would lose her baby
D.she-wolves were kind-hearted
69. What do the underlined words relate to mean?
A.know B.recognize C.understand D.touch
B)根据对话内容，从对话内容后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳答案。
Girl: It’s almost vacation time. 71 .
Boy: I suppose I can work at the boy’s camp where I worded last summer,But camp jobs don’t pay much.
Girl: 72 A friend of mine was a waiter there last summer.The pay wasn’t good,but lots of tips(小费).
Boy: My sister worked there last summer: making beds and cleaning bath rooms.She didn’t like it,but she earned quite a lot of money.
Girl: A friend of my sister’s did that one summer.
Boy: What I want is a job outside. After sitting in college classes all these months, 73 ?
Girl: The high school boys and girls earn a lot of money,he cuts somebody’s grass.My brother is only fourteen,but he gets five dollars every time while he cuts somebody’s grass,and it only takes him an hour,he just rides around on the machine that he bought,and it only takes him an hour,he just rides around on the machine that he bought,and the machine does all the work.
Boy: 74 But now I thought I might work for a road-building company,or something like that.
Girl: 75 You could earn a lot,too.
A.It would be good experience.
B.Where did you work last summer?
C.I’d like a job in the cpen summer?
D.I think I can get a job at the Evergreen Hotel.
E.I’d like a job indoors,instead.
F.That’s pretty good.I used to cut grass when I was in high school.
G.Have you found a summer job yet?
Ⅳ、单词拼写(共10小题)
根据下列句子及所给单词的首字母，写出各单词的完全形式。
76.He was a_______of being so rude to his teacher in class.
77.Men can be r_______by computers in many jobs.
78.I was a_______from class yesterday because I was ill.
79.Between the mainland and Taiwan Island lies Taiwan S_______.
80.France is a E_______country.
81.The h_______story made us all laugh.
82.Before getting on the plane you must have your l_______weighed by the airport
workers.
83.Our earth is one of the p_______of the sun.
84.A_______to this plan,we can finish the project ahead of time.
85.Tom was s_______by his mother for coming home so late.
Ⅴ、短文改错(共10小题)
此题要求改正所给短文中的错误。对标有题号的每一行作出判断：如无错误，在该行右边横线上面划个钩(√)；如有错误(每行只有一个错误)，则按下列情况改正；
此行多一个词：把多余的词用斜线(/)划掉，在该行右边横线上写出该词，并也用斜线划掉。
此行缺一个词：在缺词处加一个漏字符号(^)，在该行右边横线上写出该加的词。
此行错一个词：在错的词下划一横线，在该行右边横线上写出改正后的词。
注意：原行没有错的不要改。
In the United States old age is not happy 86._______
time.Most old people don’t live with children 87._______
and relatives.Most Americans want to stay young. 88._______
They try to keep thin and act as young people. 89._______
They even try to speak language of the youth. 90._______
They don’t want to grow old though they will 91._______
not get honour or respect or attention.Also 92._______
the businesses don’t want to employ old people. 93._______
The old doesn’t usually have things to do.Old 94._______
age can be a lonely and sad time in U.S.A. 95._______
Ⅵ、书面表达(满分25分)
假设你是李华，在一所中学读书。最近收到美国朋友Smith先生的来信。他三年前参观过你校，听说现在变化很大，希望了解有关情况。参照下图，给他写一封回信，介绍你校的变化。
注意：
1、回信必须包括图画的主要内容，可以适当增减细节，使内容连贯；
2、词数100左右；
July9
Dear Mr smith,
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Yours,
Best wishes,
Li Hua
参考答案
1-5 CDADA 6-10 DBBAB 11-15 ABDBB 16-20 DCCBA 21-25 CBCDD
26-30 CACDC 31-35 CDBDA 36-40 CBDCB 41-45 ACDBA 46-50 CDBAC
51-55 BADCB 56-60 BCDBC 61-65 CDABA 66-70 ABBBC 71-75 GDCFA
76.ashamed 77.replaced 78.absent 79.Straits 80.European
81.humorous 82.luggages 83.planets 84.According 85.scolded
86.∧happy-a 87.∧children-their 88.and-or 89.as-like 90.∧language-the
91.though-because 92.∧honour-any 93.√ 94.doesn’t-don’t 95.∧U.S.A-the
WRITNG(One possible version)
Dear Mr Smith
I was so pleased to hear to hear from you and am writhing to tell you something about my school.You are right.Quite a few changes have taken places.On one side of the road there is a new classroom building.On the other side,where the playground used to be now stands another new building-our library.In it there are all kinds of books,newspapers and magazines.The playground is now in front of the school.We have also planted a lot of trees in and around the school.I hope you come and see for yourself some day.
Best wishes,
Yours,
Li Hua
